NX3 Training Material

Practical Applications of NX
Student Guide
November 2004
MT10050 — NX 3
Manual History
Manual Unigraphics Publication

Revision Version Date
Version 15.0 February 1999
Version 16.0 January 2000
Version 17.0 December 2000
Version 18.0 September 2001
Unigraphics NX September 2002
A Unigraphics NX 2 September 2003
A NX 3 November 2004
This edition obsoletes all previous editions.
Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notices

The following proprietary and restricted rights notices apply.
Copyright
Copyright ©2004 UGS Corp. All Rights Reserved.
Restricted Rights Legend

This software and related documentation are proprietary to UGS Corp.
LIMITATIONS TO U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS. UNPUBLISHED
– RIGHTS RESERVED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT LAWS OF THE
UNITED STATES. This computer software and related computer software
documentation have been developed exclusively at private expense and are
provided subject to the following rights. If this computer software and
computer software documentation qualify as “commercial items” (as that
term is defined in FAR 2.101), their use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S.
Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forth in the
UGS Corp. commercial license for the software and/or documentation as
prescribed in FAR 12212 and FAR 27.405(b)(2)(i) (for civilian agencies) and
in DFARS 227.7202–1(a) and DFARS 227-7202-3(a) (for the Department of
© UGS Corp.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide NX 3

Defense), or any successor or similar regulation, as applicable or as amended
from time to time. If this computer software and computer documentation
do not qualify as “commercial items,” then they are “restricted computer
software” and are provided with “restrictive rights,” and their use duplication
or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and
restrictions as set forth in FAR 27.404(b) and FAR 52–227–14 (for civilian
agencies), and DFARS 227.7203–5(c) and DFARS 252.227–7014 (for the
Department of Defense), or any successor or similar regulation, as applicable
or as amended from time to time. UGS Corp., 5400 Legacy Drive, Plano,
TX 75024.
All trademarks belong to their perspective holders.
NX 3 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 3

Contents
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
How to Use This Course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Seed Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Definitions of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Starting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
NX Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Cue/Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Platform Specific Dialog Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Shared Features of Windows File Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Activity - Creating a New Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Activity - Open an Existing Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Mouse Pop-up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Class Selection Filter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Activity - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Activity - Closing Part Files and Exiting NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Activity - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling . . . . . . . . 1-41
Activity - View Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using the Dynamic WCS Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 5

Contents
Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Activity - Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Activity - Creating a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Activity - Creating a Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Creating Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Activity - Positioning Holes and Bosses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Positioning Methods Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Parameter Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Activity – Creating Pockets and Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Activity - Positioning a Groove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Editing the Size and Location of Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Editing Features with the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Activity – Editing Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Additional Positioning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Activity - Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Activity - Performing a Hollow Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Activity - Hollow and Selection Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Activity - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
6 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

Contents
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Creating Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Activity - Creating Edge Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Activity - Performing a Chamfer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Layer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Moving Objects Between Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Analysis Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Activity - Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Component Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Activity - Setting Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
The Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Node Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Activity - Working with the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Selecting Components in the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Assembly Navigator Pop-Up Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Activity – Working with the Assembly Navigator (cont.) . . . . . . . 8-26
Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Adding Components & Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Contents
Assemblies Pull-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Assemblies Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Adding Components to an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Activity – Creating an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Mate Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Align Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Angle Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Parallel Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Perpendicular Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Center Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Distance Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Tangent Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Constraint / Object Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
The Mating Conditions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Tree Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Activity - Mating the Nut Cracker Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Activity - Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Activity - Creating a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
The Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Creating New Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Activity - Creating New Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Opening a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Activity - Opening a Drawing Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Activity - Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Drawing Monochrome Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
View Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
Hidden Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-19
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Virtual Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
Adding a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-22
View Creation Options Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
Adding Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
Editing Existing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

Contents
Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

Activity - Adding Views to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29
Creating Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Creating a Linear Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
Activity - Creating a Linear Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-38
Manually Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Activity - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-42
Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Annotation Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48
Dimension Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-49
Placement Cues for Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51
Appended Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52
Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54
Text Orientation and Text Arrow Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55
Editing an Existing Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56
Activity - Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58
Text Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-63
Creating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-64
Activity - Creating Notes and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67
The Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Annotation Editor Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72
Editing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-73
Activity - Creating More Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-74
Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-77
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-78
Datum Plane Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Datum Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Datum Plane Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Datum Plane Icon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
At an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane and Through an Edge or
Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and Through a Point . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and Parallel or Perpendicular to a
Face/Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Through Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Through a Point on a Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Through a Point and at a Specified Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Activity - Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Selecting and Using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
Activity - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
Activity - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-30

Contents
Activity - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36

(Optional) Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
Datum Axis Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Datum Axis Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Datum Axis Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Through an Edge or Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Through a Cylindrical Face Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Through the Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes . . . . . . . . 13-8
Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Activity - Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Sketching Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Sketches and the Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
Activity - Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
Sketch Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Activity - Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Trimming and Extending Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Activity - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Activity - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-42
Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Activity - Adding Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-55
Editing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Activity - Editing Sketch Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-60
Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-64
Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-68
Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-72
Activity - Adding Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-74
Activity - Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-79
Activity - Sketching and Constraining a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-88
Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-98
Activity - Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-99
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-105

Contents
Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Activity - Starting the Draglink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Extrude with Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Extrude with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
The Extrude Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Activity - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Activity: Extruding Using Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Sweep Along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Activity - Sweeping Along an Open Guide String . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
Activity - Sweeping Along a Closed Guide String . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
Revolved Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
Activity - Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
Activity - Adding a Revolved Feature to the Draglink . . . . . . . . 15-44
Activity - Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Suppress and Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Feature Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Update Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Activity - Playback, Move, and Delete Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Activity - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . 16-24
Activity - Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-28
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-31
Activity - Reordering Features with the Part Navigator . . . . . . 16-35
Delaying Model Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-39
Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40
Activity - Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-44
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-48
Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Activity - Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-6
Activity - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10
Activity (Optional) - Associativity of the Rotation Axis . . . . . . . 17-14

Contents
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18
Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Icon Methods to Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Angle on Arc/Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Quadrant Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Point on Curve/Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Point on Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Rectangular Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Cylindrical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
Spherical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16
Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Customer Defaults Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Setting Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Contents
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Overview
Intended Audience
This course is suited for designers, engineers, manufacturing engineers,
application programmers, NC programmers, CAD/CAM managers, and
system managers who have a need for understanding and using NX software.
Course Objectives
After successfully completing this course, the student should be able to:
• Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory.
• Open and examine models.
• Create and edit parametric solid models.
• Create and modify basic assembly structures.
• Create and modify simple drawings.
• Modify existing geometry.
• Apply the standards used in class.
Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this class.

How to Use This Course
How to Use This Course

Activities
The format of the activities is consistent throughout this course. Steps
are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in
the activity. Below each major step are bulleted steps which describe the
individual actions that must be taken. As your knowledge of NX increases,
the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is
needed to accomplish a given task.
Step 1: Open the pau_topic_1 part.
Choose File→Open from the menu bar.
Double-click on the parts subdirectory.
Select the pau_topic_1 part and choose OK.
Mouse Buttons
The mouse will be used throughout this course to make selections. Examples
of different mouse devices are shown. The mouse buttons are referred to as
the first, second, or third mouse buttons, starting from left to right. On
mouses with mouse wheels, the wheel acts as mouse button 2 when it is
pressed. On two button mouses, the buttons represent 1 and 3. Both buttons
pushed together equals mouse button 2.
The functional assignment of the mouse buttons can be reversed in

most operating systems for users who prefer that setup.
The following abbreviations are used for the mouse buttons in this course.
• MB1 — Mouse Button 1

Overview
Class Standards
The following standards will be used in this course. Standardization allows
users to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others.
All work should be performed in accordance with these standards.
Part File Naming
In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring

the user to open a part, the user community must establish standard names
for the various files associated with the part definition. The following is a
sample usage of a file naming standard:
Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four

character extension (.prt) is automatically added to define the file
type. This means the maximum number of user defined characters
for the file name is actually 124.

Class Standards
Seed Parts
Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any
settings that are part-dependent (saved with the part file). This may include
non-geometric data such as:
• Preferences
• Commonly used expressions
• Layer categories
• User-defined views and layouts
• Part attributes
Once a seed part is established, it should be write-protected to

avoid accidental modification.
Two seed parts are available for use in this course, pau_seedpart_in for inch
parts and pau_seedpart_mm for metric parts. These parts incorporate the
standards described above.
Colors
The following colors are preset to indicate different object types:
Object Valid Colors

Solid Bodies Light Gray (87)
Sheet Bodies Light Dull Azure (92)
Lines and Arc Dark Hard Blue (212)
(non-sketch curves)
Conics and Splines Dark Hard Blue (212)
(non-sketch curves)
Sketch Curves Obscure Dull Green (144)
Reference Curves Dark Faded Cyan (105)
(in sketches)
Datum Features Light Weak Red (81)
Points and Coordinate Systems Dark Hard Blue (212)
System Display Color Orange Orange Red (114)
NX identifies colors using numbers with ID’s that range from 1 to

216.

Overview
Definitions of Terms
Explicit Modeling
Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. Objects are created
relative to model space, not each other. Changes to one or more objects do not
necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. Examples of explicit
modeling include creating a line between two existing points or creating an
arc through three existing points. If one of the existing points were moved,
the line/arc would not change.
Parametric Modeling
A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for
the definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing.
Parameters may reference each other to establish relationships between the
various features of the model. Examples include the diameter and depth of a
hole or the length, width, and height of a rectangular pad. The designer’s
intent may be that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Linking
these parameters together may achieve the desired results. This is not easily
accomplished with an explicit model.
Constraint-based Modeling
A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven
or solved from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model
as constraints. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such
as sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints
(such as parallelism or tangency). Examples include a line tangent to an arc
where the designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even
though the angle of the line may change or a perpendicular condition being
maintained as angles are modified.
Hybrid Modeling
Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types of
modeling described above. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use parametric
modeling where needed without requiring that the entire model be
constrained before proceeding. Because of this, designers have more flexibility
in modeling techniques. The NX hybrid modeler supports traditional explicit
geometric modeling along with constraint-based sketching and parametric
feature modeling. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination.

Lesson
1 Getting Started
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the NX User Interface.
Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student’s understanding.
Objectives
Upon completion of this lesson, you will be able to:
• Start NX.
• Locate the Cue/Status line.
• Execute Menu Bar Pull Down Menus.
• Create a New Part.
• Dock and Undock Toolbars.
• Open a Part.
• Copy a Part.
• Close a Part and Exit NX.
• Manipulate the orientation of a view.
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 1-1
Getting Started
Starting NX
The first step in working in NX is to log on to a workstation and start an
NX process. Because this procedure varies from company to company and
from platform to platform, consult the system administrator for a site
specific procedure to follow. The NX Activity Menu shown below will not be
displayed on Windows workstations, and may or may not be displayed on
Unix workstations.
NX Site Specific Startup
1-2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
Getting Started
NX Windows
The graphic below shows the "No Part" NX interface. This interface only
allows the user to adjust default options, open an existing part, or create a
new part in which to work.
Getting Started
The Gateway Application
Upon opening an existing part or creating a new part in NX the Gateway

application is entered. Gateway allows the review of existing part files and
the ability to get information on those files. To create or edit objects within a
file, one of the other applications such as Modeling must be entered.
1 — Work and displayed part names
2 — Maximize and minimize graphics window (Windows platforms only)
3 — Resource Bar
4 — Cue line
5 — Status line
Getting Started
Cue/Status Line
The Cue/Status line appears at the bottom of the main application window.
The purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction. The purpose of
the Status line is to give the user feedback about system activity.
In a Windows environment the Cue and Status line can be relocated
to the top of the user interface.
Menu Bar Pull-Down Menus

The Menu Bar offers a number of options from which to choose. These options
have pull-down menus associated with them that allow access to areas of
functionality. Holding the first mouse button down (MB1) over a Menu Bar
option causes the pull-down menu to display. Arrows to the right of the
pull-down listing indicate that further cascading options are available.
By default, menus appear “folded” so that only the more frequently used
options are shown. The down arrow at the bottom of the menu can be selected
to display the full menu.
To permanently display the entire menus, choose Tools→Customize,

choose the Options tab, and toggle on the Always Show Full Menus
option.
Getting Started
Platform Specific Dialog Variance
Most interaction with dialogs is the same on Windows (1) and Unix (2)
platforms. The controls such as slider bars, check boxes, option menus have a
slightly different appearance.
The graphics in this text are taken from a Windows workstation.

Some of the dialogs at your classroom workstation may differ
slightly from those shown.
Getting Started
Shared Features of Windows File Dialogs
The New Part File, Open Part File, and Save Part File As dialogs have some
very useful common features.
The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or
directory. Selecting the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within
the box) will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives.
Choosing anywhere away from the list of the available folders and drives will
dismiss the listing without selecting another folder or drive.
The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders
and files in the currently selected directory. The folder symbol represents a
subdirectory. NX part files have a .prt extension.
The Up One Level option works with the Look in: option menu to
traverse back up through the directory hierarchy.
Getting Started
The Create New Folder option allows new sub-folders to be created in

the current directory.
The View Menu option menu allows the appearance of the listing in the
window to be modified. The default is a List. Selecting the Details button will
display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name, Size,
Type, last Modified date and time, and any Attributes that may apply to the
file. Other options include Thumbnails, Tiles, and Icons.
The button at the top right of the dialog changes the cursor to and
allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog for a short description of
their function.
Getting Started
Activity - Creating a New Part
This activity demonstrates how to create a new part.

Step 1: Create a new part.
Choose the New icon. (File→New)

The New Part File dialog appears as shown.
Step 2: Specify the units of measure for the new part.

Verify the Millimeters radio button is selected for the Units.
Getting Started
Step 3: Enter a new part name.

With Mouse Button 1 (MB1), click in the File name field.
Key in ***_new_1, where *** represents your initials.

This will be a standard practice for this class to insure that
the user at each workstation will be able to save his or her
own parts.
File names are governed by the naming conventions
established for the operating system of the computer. In
addition, standards set up by the company or project will affect
naming conventions. Contact your system administrator for
specific information on the number and types of characters
for a valid file name.
Ensure the directory is set to your “home” directory. This will

also be a standard practice for this class. Parts that you create
should be saved in a directory to which you have permissions.
Choose OK.
The information is processed and the part is created and
“loaded” into the current NX session.
The creator of a file has read and write access, which means they
may modify the file and save the changes.
Step 4: Save the part.
Choose the Save icon. (File→Save)
Getting Started
Toolbars
The NX user interface supports the use of toolbars to allow quick access
to most of the available functionality via logical groupings of common
functionality displayed as icons. Each application has a set of toolbars
which support functions within that application. In turn, each application
can also have toolbars and icons displayed which allow access to functions
which are most commonly accessed for the specific application (e.g. Modeling
vs. Drafting)
When the NX session is exited, the state of the toolbars is saved.
This will be the state displayed when the same user starts a new
session of NX. This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option
under the General tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog.
Toolbars may be in one of two states:
• Undocked toolbars (1) are free floating on the screen. These toolbars are
shown within the NX window, but may be located outside the window
depending on screen setup.
• Docked toolbars (2) are anchored to the main NX window, either

horizontally or vertically. Docked toolbars are always within the NX
window.
Getting Started
Customizing Toolbars
The display of the toolbars as well as the display of each element within a
toolbar may be customized.
The display of a toolbar may be accomplished in one of two ways:
• Choose Tools→Customize from the main menu bar to access the
Customize dialog. On the Toolbars page, choose the check box next to
the toolbar name to display or hide it. The toolbars with a check are
currently displayed.
Getting Started
• Use the Third Mouse Button (MB3) within the NX window, outside the
graphics window to display a menu of all toolbars. The toolbars listed
with a check box are currently displayed. Selecting a toolbar name with
the First Mouse Button (MB1) will toggle it on or off. The Customize
option may be selected to access the Customize dialog.
Getting Started
To turn on and off the display of icons within a toolbar, select the Toolbar
Options area of the toolbar and choose Add or Remove Buttons, and the
toolbar name. This will display a cascading menu with all of the available
icons for the toolbar. Placing a check in the box next to the command will
immediately display the icon in the appropriate toolbar. Removing the check
will hide the icon.
The Toolbar Options menu can be accessed in an undocked toolbar as shown

below.
Getting Started
Opening Multiple Parts
More than one part may be open (loaded) at any time. This means that
several parts may be worked on interchangeably. There are two designations
for these loaded parts:
• Displayed - The part is displayed in the graphics window.
• Work - The part is accessible for creation and editing operations.
In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. There are
times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work
part be other than the displayed part.
Changing the Displayed Part

Since multiple parts may be open at any given time, it will be necessary
to control which part is displayed in the graphics window. This can be
accomplished with the Window menu bar option.
The Window option works in two ways:
• A list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated as the displayed
part is changed. This list contains the latest displayed part at the top
(excluding the currently displayed part) and then each previous part in the
order that they were displayed until a total of ten are listed. To change the
displayed part to any of these parts, simply select its name from the list.
• Choose Window→More to display the Change Window dialog. This

dialog lists all parts being referenced in the current session, excluding
the current displayed part. This listing will include all components in
an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in
a loaded assembly.
Getting Started
Activity - Open an Existing Part
This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient

working environment in the Gateway application for this course as well as
how to load an existing part file into the work session.
Continue working with the ***_new_1 part.
Step 1: Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.
Click MB3 in the toolbar area (1) and choose Customize (2).
Getting Started
The Customize Dialog appears and shows the current toolbars

which are displayed.
Step 2: Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON.

The Standard toolbar should be displayed and docked in the upper
left corner under the Menu bar.
Step 3: Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog.
Step 4: Open the pau_intro_1 part.
Choose the Open icon. (File→Open)

The Open Part File dialog appears.
Getting Started
Check the current directory displayed in the Look in: field. If

necessary, choose the proper directory from the option menu.
Notice that there are no radio buttons for Inches and

Millimeters in the Open Part File dialog. The units of the
parts were determined when they were created and cannot be
changed within an active NX session. The units of a part can
be converted using a program called ug_convert_part.exe
outside of the active NX session.
Getting Started
Select pau_intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK to open

the part (or double-click on the file name).
The Status Line displays information while the part is being
retrieved as well as other information pertaining to the
operation being performed.
Once the part is open the following actions occur:
Options for viewing the contents of the file are available on

the menu bar.
The graphics window is now active, showing the model in the

condition in which it was last saved.
The title bar of the graphics window displays the name of the
current work part (pau_intro_1.prt) and a status of Read Only.
This means that changes may not be saved in this file.
A loaded part is only a copy of what is stored on disk. Any
new work that you do is not permanent until the part is
saved on disk.
Step 5: Display additional toolbars.

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View, Selection,
Utility, and Snap Point toolbars are checked on.
Getting Started
The toolbars are displayed on the screen in a docked state.

Toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and
vertically on the left or right.
Step 6: Undock and Dock the Utility toolbar.

The following portion of the activity is intended to show
how to undock and dock toolbars. Whether toolbars are
in docked or undocked conditions, the process for moving
them is very similar.
Place the cursor on the handle portion (1) of the Utility toolbar
and press and hold down MB1.
Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window.
Getting Started
Release MB1.
The name of the toolbar is displayed in it’s title bar while
it is undocked.
Place the cursor on the header portion (1) of the Utility toolbar
Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the
main menu bar as shown.
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar is docked to the NX window.
Step 7: Move a docked toolbar.
Getting Started
Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar

Drag the toolbar so that it is aligned under the Standard

toolbar completely to the left side of the window.
Release MB1.
The Utility toolbar remains docked to the NX window in the
proper position.
If necessary, select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the
toolbar so that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar.
Getting Started
If necessary, select the Selection toolbar on the handle and

drag the toolbar so that it is aligned to the right of the Utility
toolbar.
Step 8: Leave the part open. It will be used again.
Getting Started
Mouse Navigation
The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. A mouse
wheel acts as MB2 when it is pressed. On two button mouses, the buttons
represent MB1 and MB3. Both buttons pressed together acts as MB2.
Below is a summary of the various actions that can be performed using

the mouse buttons.
Mouse Button Action

First Mouse Button Selects or drags objects.
MB1
Second Mouse Button OK while in an operator. Press and hold down
(center or while in the graphics area to Rotate the view.
both buttons) Hold down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down
MB2 Ctrl+MB2 to Zoom In/Out.
Third Mouse Button Displays pop-up menu with short cuts to various
(in graphic window) functions. Also displays action information for
MB3 objects selected with MB1.
Rotating mouse wheel Zooms in and out in graphics window. Scrolls in
dialog list boxes, dialog option menus, and the
Information window.
Cursor over icons or Displays either the icon or option label.
option in a dialog
Cursor over Pre–highlights objects based upon the Selection
objects, features toolbar setting (e.g. Select Features)
or components in
graphics window
A combination of mouse buttons can also be used to pan (MB2+MB3)

and zoom In/Out (MB1+MB2).
Getting Started
Mouse Pop-up Menu
The mouse may be used to perform various actions depending upon placement
and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics
window and MB3 is depressed and released, the View Pop-Up menu is
displayed. This pop-up menu provides a shortcut to functions that are
frequently used in NX to manipulate the viewing of objects in the graphics
window..
Getting Started
Option Description
Refreshes the entire graphics window. Erases temporary
Refresh
display entities.
Fit Fits the entire part to the view. Utilizes the fit percentage
found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog.
Zoom Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle.
Rotate Activates the Rotate mode to rotate the view with the cursor.
Pan Activates Pan mode to pan the view with the cursor.
Update Performs a Refresh operation as well as redisplaying
Display silhouetted curves of faces and hidden edges of solids.
Restore Restores the original view that was in effect before zoom,
pan, rotate operations were performed.
Specifies the shading method in which the solid model is
Display Mode
displayed.
Hidden Specifies the method of display of hidden edges in the
Edges graphics window.
Redisplays the current view in a canned view orientation.
Orient View The original visualization settings and view modifications
are retained. Active only in modeling view.
Replace View Replaces the current view with one of the canned views.
Active only in modeling view.
Set Rotate Defines a point that the model is rotated about. The point
Point may be defined on a curve, edge, face, or point in space.
Undo Removes the effect of the last single operation performed.
When you press and hold MB3, a radial pop-up displays icons that surround
the cursor location. These icons include display options that you can choose
just as you would from a menu. As you learn the position of the icons,
moving the mouse in the appropriate direction is all that is required to cause
the desired action to occur.
1 — Shaded
2 — Face Analysis
3 — Fit
4 — Wireframe
5 — Studio
Getting Started
The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view
manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.
Graphics Window View Manipulation
As you develop your model, you will view the model in different orientations.
The view may rotated by pressing and holding down MB2 and dragging. If
the cursor is in the middle of the graphics window, the axis of rotation is
determined by the direction in which you drag the cursor.
If the cursor is near the boundary of the graphics window, rotation about a
horizontal, vertical, or normal axis is inferred and the cursor is displayed in a
single axis rotation mode.
Getting Started
Other options to manipulate the view orientation are described below:

Orient View – Modifies the orientation of a specified view to a predefined
view. Changes only the alignment of the view, not the view name. This option
can be invoked from the View toolbar or from the MB3 pop-up menu.
Replace View — Switches from a specified view to a predefined view. This

option can be invoked from the MB3 pop-up menu.
Home Key — Reorients the present view to the Trimetric view.
End Key — Reorients the present view to the Isometric view.
F8 Key — Reorients the present view to a selected planar face or datum
plane or the planar view (top, front, right, back, bottom, left) that is closest to
the current view orientation.
Set to WCS — This icon on the View toolbar orients the present view
to the XC-YC plane of the WCS.
Getting Started
Selection Toolbar
The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of an object for
creation, modification, or the extraction of data is required. There are three
major categories of objects that may be selected; General Objects (1),
Features (2), and Components (3). Depending on which category is selected,
the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.
Getting Started
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate

in the selection of objects.
1 — Color 5 — Class Selection

2 — Layer 6 — Select All
3 — Name Selection 7 — Deselect All
4 — Reset
MB3 may be used to choose an available operator for an object. The cursor
must be on top of the object and the object highlighted for the MB3 pop-up
menu to appear. The items on the pop-up menu will vary depending on
the type of object.
The menus shown are typical for General Objects (1), Features (2), and
Components (3).
Options will also vary depending on the application (Modeling,

Drafting, Manufacturing, etc.).
Getting Started
If you press and hold MB3 over an object, a radial pop-up appears. The
options will vary depending on the type of object. The radial pop-up menus
shown below are typical for a solid body (1), feature (2), and component (3).
Getting Started
Preselection
Preselection allows highlighting of objects that are selectable for various

operations as the selection ball is moved over them. Preselection by default is
on in NX. Preselection may be controlled by choosing Preferences→Selection
from the menu bar. The color of the highlighting is specified by choosing
Preferences→Visualization→Color Settings. Preselection also applies to
highlighting objects that are being deselected, usually through use of the
<Shift> key and MB1. The state of the Preselection setting is not saved with
the part, and lasts only through the current session.
Multiple Selection Candidates

While selecting objects in the graphics window, it is common that more than
one selectable object will be within the selection ball. QuickPick is a selection
confirmation interface that allows immediate selection of a single object or an
easy method for browsing through multiple selection candidates.
During selection, the act of moving the selection ball over a selectable object
causes the object to pre-highlight in the preselection color. Selecting during
this pre-highlighting phase causes the highlighted object to be chosen for
the action to be performed.
If there is more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and
the cursor lingers for a short period of time, the appearance of the cursor
changes to a cross followed by an ellipsis (+...) indicating that there is more
than one selectable object at this position. Selection after the cursor changes
display will result in the presentation of the QuickPick dialog shown below.
The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the ellipsis
(+...) to appear can be adjusted by choosing Preferences→Selection
and adjusting the Automatic Confirmation slider.
Each selectable object beneath the cursor is represented by a number. Moving
the cursor over the number highlights the object in the graphics area and
displays the type of object in the Status area. The desired object may be
selected by selecting its numbered button. The maximum number of buttons
displayed at once is six. As shown in the previous graphic, when there are
more than six objects in the selection list, the end button is shown truncated.
Placing the cursor in the area outside the truncation causes the buttons
to scroll in the direction indicated.
Getting Started
When the Quick Pick dialog is presented upon selection of an

object, MB1 can also be used anywhere on the graphics screen to
progress through the multiple candidates. This will also progress
the highlighted number in the Quick Pick dialog and give feedback
in the Status line displaying the type of object being highlighted.
Getting Started
Class Selection
The Class Selection dialog is used to filter for certain types of objects during
graphics area selection. Normally direct selection using the selection ball
in the graphics area is enough to get the desired object. There are times
when filtering using the Class Selection options is necessary or very helpful
to ensure that only desired object/types are selected. This often occurs in
complex parts.
Getting Started
Class Selection Filter Types
• Name allows selection by object(s) by entering an assigned name

attribute.
• Filter Methods allows control of the selection of objects according to

attributes such as features, type, color, and layer.
– Features allows features (e.g. block, hole, datum, sketch) to be
selected for various operations (e.g. delete or information). Once this
option has been selected and features have been identified, choosing
OK will perform the operation which introduced the Class Selection
dialog. This option is not available for all operations (e.g. edit object
display and Move to Layer).
– Type — allows the object types (e.g. curve, edge, body, datums) to be
included or excluded from the selection process.
– Layer — used to specify the layer(s) on which to allow selection.

Valid layer selection may include a single layer, an existing category,
or a layer range.
– Other — used to filter for font (line type), width, and user-defined
attributes.
– Reset — used to return all fields to the default state.
– Color — allows objects to be included or excluded from the selection

process based on their color. All colors are initially selectable as the
default.
Getting Started
• Rectangle/Polygon Method — option menu used to specify how objects

are selected relative to an area defined by a rectangle or a polygon as
discussed below. The rectangle or polygon is oriented in the current view
plane and may be used in any view. A rectangle may be used by selecting
a cursor location and dragging the cursor to another cursor location. The
Polygon button must be selected prior to specifying the boundary with
rubber-banding line segments in the graphics area.
– Inside — Objects completely inside the rectangle/polygon are selected.
– Outside — Objects completely outside the rectangle/polygon are

selected.
– Crossing — Objects crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon

are selected.
– Inside/Crossing — All objects inside the rectangle/polygon as well

as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon. This is the
default method.
– Outside/Crossing — All objects outside the rectangle/polygon as well

as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon.
• Up One Level — allows selection of the next level component or group

if components or groups are enabled for that operation. This is useful
in assemblies work.
• Select All — selects all objects in the work view by current filter methods
settings.
• All but Selected — selects all objects in the work view except for those
currently highlighted by selection.
• Chain — allows the selection of a sequence of contiguous curves or edges.
• Polygon — allows the selection of objects using a polygon that is specified

in the graphics area. (See Rectangle/Polygon Method above.)
Getting Started
Activity - Save Part As (Copying a Part File)
This activity shows how to make a copy of an existing part by saving it with a
different name.
Continue with the previous part file pau_intro_1.
Step 1: Create a copy of a part.
Choose File→Save As.
The Save Part File As dialog appears.
Step 2: Save a copy of the part in the desired directory.

In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu
to navigate to the proper directory to save the part file. (HINT:
This should be one level up from the parts folder.)
Getting Started
Step 3: Enter a new part name.

Click in the File name field.
Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part name where *** represents

your initials.
Choose OK.
The Status Line states that the part is being saved. When
the save is complete, the message “Part file saved” displays.
Work in NX may be resumed.
You can save your work and exit NX all at once by choosing
File→Close→Save All and Exit.
Getting Started
Activity - Closing Part Files and Exiting NX
This activity shows how to close a part and exit NX.

Continue with the previous part ***_intro_1.
Use File→Close→Selected Parts to close one or more of the loaded parts.
Close All may be used to close all parts loaded in the current session from
the Close Part dialog.
Step 1: Close the part.
Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
The Close Part dialog appears showing a list of all open parts,
which currently include ***_intro_1 and ***_new_1.
Getting Started
Select the ***_intro_1 part file and choose MB2.

Because the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is
immediately closed. If the part had been changed, the system
displays a warning message letting you know that the part has
been modified since it was last saved.
Closing the part does not save the part, it only clears the part
from the local memory. Changes that have been made to the
part will be lost if the close operation is continued.
Step 2: Close the NX work session.

Choose File→Exit.
A dialog displays.
If parts are still open and have been modified, a message displays:
Step 3: Choose No to dismiss the message and keep the session open.
Do not Exit NX at this time.
Getting Started
Activity - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling
This activity will establish an efficient toolbar working environment in the

Modeling application for this course. Other toolbars can be added as needed.
Step 1: Change the displayed part to ***_new_1
(HINT: Choose Window from the menu bar)
Step 2: Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway Application.

If necessary, click MB3 in the toolbar area and toggle on the
Application toolbar.
Step 3: Customize the Application toolbar.

Locate the Application toolbar in the NX window. (It may be
docked or undocked.)
Getting Started
Select the Toolbar Options area of the Application toolbar

and choose Add or Remove Buttons→Application.
A listing with the buttons for the Application toolbar is

displayed. The buttons displayed on the toolbar are checked.
Toggle on the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies buttons

and toggle off all others.
The application toolbar is docked as shown below.
Step 4: Start the Modeling Application.
Getting Started
Choose the Modeling icon in the Application toolbar.

(Application→Modeling)
Entering a different application will introduce a new set of
toolbars. The toolbars that were established in the Gateway
application may move and have different commands in them.
Step 5: Invoke saved toolbar settings.

In each application (Modeling, Drafting, etc.) it is possible to save
the toolbar layout and the commands stored within them. This
is accomplished using the Save Layout option in the Customize
dialog. Toolbar settings for the applications, gateway, modeling,
drafting, and sketching have been saved for you.
Choose Tools→Customize.
Choose the Layout tab.
Choose Reset Layout.
A warning will appear stating that changes made to the

toolbars will be reset and ask if you would like to continue.
Choose Yes to continue.
Choose Close.
Getting Started
Notice that the toolbars have been rearranged and new

commands for the modeling application are now available.
Step 6: Close the part and do not save it.

Choose File→Close→All Parts.
Choose Yes in the Close All Parts window.
Getting Started
Activity - View Manipulation

This activity will provide you with an opportunity to become familiar with
changing the view display and orientation.
Step 1: Open the pau_clevis_1 part.
Step 2: Start the Modeling application. (Application→Modeling)
Step 3: Manipulate the view.
Choose Shaded. (MB3→Display Mode→Shaded)
In the graphics window, but not on top of the part, click MB3.
A pop-up menu appears.
Choose Replace View→TFR-ISO

Notice that in the bottom left corner of the view, the name
has changed to TFR-ISO indicating a different view. Also,
notice that the view is no longer shaded, this is because view
manipulations such as shading and edge display are view
dependent.
Choose Replace View→TFR-TRI from the MB3 pop-up menu.

The view name changes, the model is reoriented, and displayed
as a shaded solid.
Choose Orient View→Isometric from the MB3 pop-up menu.

The view name remains the same; the model is reoriented, and
displayed as a shaded solid. The view remains shaded because
the view has not been changed, but only reoriented.
Click and hold MB3 and choose the Wireframe icon.

from the radial pop-up.
Press the Home key on the keyboard.

The view is reoriented to the Trimetric view.
Press the End key.

The view is reoriented to the Isometric view.
Getting Started
Notice the location and orientation of the coordinate system.

This is called the work coordinate system (WCS) and can be
used to facilitate geometry construction.
From the View toolbar, choose Set to WCS. .

The view is oriented so that the XC-YC plane of the WCS is
parallel to the graphic screen. The +X axis points horizontally
to the right. The +Y axis points up vertically. The +Z axis
points normal to the plane of the screen towards you.
From the Selection toolbar, choose Select General Objects.
Select the face as shown below.
Press the F8 key.

The view is oriented so that the selected face is parallel to the
graphic screen.
Step 4: Close the part and do not save.
Getting Started
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Started NX and were made aware that the user interface appearance may
be slightly different on Unix and Windows platforms.
• Executed Menu Bar Pull Down Menus and saw how these tools can save
time.
• Created, retrieved, and saved parts. By performing these functions you

were made aware of that parts are only loaded into memory and are not
saved until performing a "save" or "save as" operation.
• Copied a Part File.
• Closed a Part File.
• Exited NX.
• Activated toolbars and adjusted the commands within them.
• Manipulated view orientation.
Lesson
2 Introduction to Solid Modeling
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the NX Modeling application.
Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student’s understanding.
Objectives
• Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS).
• Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS).
• Manipulate the WCS.
• Define Points for Locations.
• Create and Edit a Block.
• Create a direction vector.
• Create and edit a Cylinder.
Introduction to Solid Modeling
Coordinate Systems
Before any portions of the solid model may be defined, it is important to
understand the options NX offers for location and orientation of objects. Since
solid modeling takes place in a three-dimensional environment, model space
is defined as the infinite extension of a three-dimensional field represented
in the views of your graphics area.
There are many coordinate systems in available for use, all are right-hand,
Cartesian coordinate systems, made up of a set of X, Y, and Z axes, 90 apart
from each other.
A three-axis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system. The intersection
of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. The origin has the
coordinate values of X=0, Y=0, and Z=0. The figure below illustrates that,
starting at the origin, each axis has a positive direction and a negative
direction.
This manual will primarily discuss the following different coordinate system
types used in NX modeling.
• Absolute Coordinate System (ABS)
• Work Coordinate System (WCS)
• Feature Coordinate System
Absolute Coordinate System

The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. It defines a fixed
point and orientation in model space. The Absolute Coordinate System is
necessary to relate location or orientation between any two objects, solid
models, NX parts, or even an NX part to any other CAE system. An object
positioned at Absolute X= 1, Y=1, and Z=1 in one part is the exact same
absolute position in any other part.
Work Coordinate System

Since the ABS is not mobile, NX uses the Work Coordinate System (WCS)
to establish a mobile coordinate system to facilitate geometry construction
in different orientations. The WCS can be located and oriented manually
anywhere in model space. The WCS is not a selectable entity.
Most solid modeling operations in NX do not require manipulation of the
WCS, since features are added to a model relative to existing geometry of
the model, not relative to positions and directions in model space. In those
cases, the WCS is handled automatically by NX. However, certain functions
are dependent on the WCS, and require the WCS to be oriented prior to
performing the operation. Curve and Primitive creation are two functions
dependent on the WCS.
The following functions are dependent on the WCS:
• Primitive Feature Creation
• Sketch Creation
• Basic Curves
• Rectangular Instance Arrays
• Creation of Fixed Reference Features
Manipulating the WCS
The WCS options are accessed by choosing Format→WCS on the menu bar or
from the Utility toolbar while a part is displayed.
In general, there are four different options available to manipulate the WCS;
Origin, Dynamics, Rotate, and Orient. The Dynamics and Orient options will
be the focus in this lesson.
WCS Dynamics
The WCS Dynamics option provides a dynamic interface to control the
location and orientation of the WCS by entering values or dragging handles of
the WCS in the graphics window.
WCS Dynamics can be accessed by double-clicking the WCS in the graphics
window, choosing the WCS Dynamics icon from the Utility toolbar, or by
choosing Format→WCS→Dynamics from the menu bar.
Drag handles are displayed and may be used to manipulate the WCS. The
handles are represented by a cube, three coneheads, and three spheres.
WCS Dynamics may be accessed by double-clicking directly on the

WCS in the graphics window. When the cursor is placed directly
over the WCS, temporary rotation planes will be displayed to
indicate that the WCS can be selected. If the WCS cannot be easily
selected in the graphics window, the Utility toolbar or menu bar
can be used.
Using the Dynamic WCS Handles
Origin Handle
If the cube-shaped handle at the origin of the WCS is selected, the WCS can
be relocated to any point on the graphics screen as dictated by the Snap
Point toolbar (e.g. control point, cursor position, arc center, etc.) and help
indicators will display next to an object to help you predict where the WCS
will be relocated.
Snap Point Toolbar

The Snap Point toolbar is active during WCS dynamics to help in defining
origin points.
When the Snap Point toolbar is active, Cursor Location is always available
regardless of the point types turned on.
Axis Handle
If a conehead axis handle is selected, a Dynamic Input Field appears on the
graphics window next to the WCS, which allows input of a specific distance
or snap increment. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to
be dragged along its axis.
Double-clicking an axis handle will reverse the direction of the axis.
Rotation Handle
If a spherical rotation handle is selected, a Dynamic Input Field appears next

to the WCS, which allows input of a specific angle or snap increment. This
handle will also allow the coordinate system to be rotated about an axis.
Distance/Angle
When the Dynamic Input Field appears next to the WCS the Distance/Angle
fields display the offset distance or rotation that results from a dragging
operation. You can also use these fields to directly enter a distance or rotation
angle.
Snap
The Snap field specifies an incremental angle or distance to move the WCS
as you drag a Rotation or Axis handle. The default Snap value for rotation
is 45 so the WCS snaps in 45 degree increments as you drag a Rotation
handle. The Angle field will update to the angle moved as the handle is
dragged. The default Snap value for distance is 0 (zero) but you can change
it to define an increment. The Distance field will update to the distance
moved as the axis handle is dragged.
Exiting WCS Dynamics

After all of the moves have been completed, use MB2 to confirm the location
and orientation of the WCS and exit WCS Dynamics.
Undo is available and can be used during WCS movement to restore
the WCS to a previous location or orientation.
Defining Points for Location
NX offers a standard dialog that provides multiple point methods to define

locations. The Point Constructor dialog will appear while specifying the
origin of the WCS, primitives, and other geometry.
The Point Constructor option is also available on the Snap Point

toolbar to position and can be used when specifying the origin of the WCS
using WCS Dynamics.
With this dialog, you can define origin points, start points, endpoints, etc.
based on existing geometry or coordinate values. The icons within the Point
Constructor dialog may be identified by placing the cursor over them.
For more information on point types in the Point Constructor

dialog, see Appendix B.
Utility Toolbar
The WCS options may also be accessed through the Utility toolbar.
The Set WCS to Absolute option moves the WCS back to the Absolute
origin and orientation.
The Orient WCS option allows the location and the rotation of the WCS
to be altered in one step. The CSYS Constructor dialog is displayed and
contains various options to orient the WCS.
Activity - Manipulating the WCS
In this activity, the WCS will be moved to different positions on a model.

By default, the WCS location and orientation in a new part coincides
with the Absolute Coordinate System. During model construction, NX
usually manages the WCS automatically. However, some construction and
information functions depend on the WCS, so it is helpful to learn how to
manipulate the WCS.
Step 1: Open the pau_wcs_1 part.
Step 3: Change the Work Coordinate System origin.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon from the Utility

toolbar. (Format→WCS→Dynamics)
Select a few of the various locations shown. Do not select any

of the WCS handles.
The origin handle is selected by default when entering WCS

Dynamics. You can simply pick points in the graphics window
to move the WCS based on the Snap Point toolbar settings. The
relocated WCS maintains the same XC, YC, and ZC directions
as the original WCS.
Choose MB2 to exit WCS Dynamics when you are finished

moving the WCS.
Step 4: Change the direction of the Work Coordinate System axes.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.

(Format→WCS→Dynamics)
Move the WCS to the arc center shown below by placing the
cursor over the circular edge; when the center is highlighted,
select the edge.
Select the Rotation Handle shown below.
The Dynamic Input Field appears allowing an angle or snap

(angle) to be entered.
Enter -90 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter.
The origin of the WCS is unchanged, the coordinate system
is rotated about the XC axis 90 . The direction of rotation is
based on the Right Hand Rule.
Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.
Step 5: Change the orientation of the WCS.

The image below has been rotated for clarity. You may shade or
rotate the view for better viewing of the part.
Choose the WCS Dynamics icon.

(Format→WCS→Dynamics)
Move the WCS to the location shown below.
Select the XC Axis Handle as shown below.
Orient the XC Axis Handle to the edge shown below by

selecting the edge at the location as indicated by the arrow. A
vector will appear from the end of the selected edge.
Select the YC Axis Handle.
Orient the YC Axis Handle to the edge shown below by

selecting the edge at the location as indicated by the arrow. A
vector will appear from the end of the selected edge.
Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.
Step 6: Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.

Choose the Set WCS to Absolute icon from the Utility toolbar.
The WCS moves back to the Absolute origin and orientation.
Step 7: Choose File→Close→All Parts and choose Yes to confirm the

closing of modified parts.
Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be

thought of as "raw stock" to which material will be added or removed to
achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the
four Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start
of the solid modeling process. Using one of the Primitive types as the base
feature eliminates the need to create and sweep curve geometry.
When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as
its location and orientation in model space.
The four types of Primitives are:
• Block
• Cylinder
• Cone
• Sphere
Although NX allows the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body,

the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and
associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is
used in a part, it should be used as the initial solid feature.
Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a
specified point in model space. However, they can be moved
manually by either using Transform or, preferably, using Move
Feature. The creation parameter values of a Primitive may be
edited and made associative to each other.
Block
A Block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in
model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS.
There are three different methods that may be used to create a Block, Origin
Edge Lengths, Two Points Height, and Two Diagonal Points. The middle
portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type of
Block creation method you choose. This lesson discusses the first method,
Origin, Edge Lengths.
Origin, Edge Lengths Method
• Choose the Block icon. (Insert→Design Feature→Block)
• Choose the type of Origin, Edge Lengths.
• Define the length for each edge.

The Length, Width, and Height are measured relative to the
XC, YC, and ZC axes of the WCS, respectively. These must
be positive values since they are stored as the parameters of
the block.
• Choose the desired Boolean Operation.
• Specify the origin of the corner of the block. The Snap Point toolbar is
available to access the Point Constructor dialog or to specify a point
relative to existing geometry. The edges of the block will be parallel to
the XC, YC, and ZC axes.
If an origin is not specified explicitly and OK is chosen, the
corner of the block will be placed at the WCS origin.
• Choose OK or Apply.
After the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the
values that were used for edge lengths during creation.
Activity - Creating a Block
In this activity, a Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths
method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block.
Step 1: Create a new inch part and name it ***_block_1 where ***
represents your initials.
Step 3: Create a Block.
Choose the Block icon. (Insert→Design Feature→Block)
Verify the Origin, Edge Lengths type is selected.
Key in the following parameters Length (XC) = 8 (Tab)Length

(YC) = 6 (Tab)Length (ZC) = 6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)
Choose MB2.
Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar. (MB3→Fit)
Step 4: Change the size of the block.
Ensure the Select Features icon is on in the Selection

toolbar.
Place the cursor over the block an double-click on it to enter

Edit Parameters.
Select the p1=6.000 parameter to edit.
Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.
Step 5: Choose File→Close→Save and Close.
Defining Vectors
The Cone and Cylinder features require a direction vector to define in what
direction the primitive will be created. The direction vector may be defined
using the Vector Constructor dialog shown below. The icons of the Vector
Constructor dialog may be identified by placing the cursor over them.
The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of
this course.
Cylinder
A cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation, size and location of
the cylinder. The methods to create cylinders are shown in the next figure.
Diameter, Height Method

This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and
height values. The location and axis direction vector must also be specified.
After choosing this method:
• Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor.
• Enter the Diameter and Height.
• Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor.
In the example below, the direction vector is the ZC Axis. The cylinder is
shown created at an origin away from the WCS with a specified height in
the direction of the vector.
Activity - Creating a Cylinder

In this activity, a cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector menu.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_mm part.
Step 3: Create the Cylinder.
Choose the Cylinder icon.

(Insert→Design Feature→Cylinder)
Choose the Diameter, Height method.
Choose the YC Axis direction icon from the Vector Constructor.
Enter the following values:
Diameter = 75
Height = 200
Choose OK.
Locate the cylinder at XC=0, YC=0, ZC=0. Choose Reset in

the Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Fit from the MB3 Pop-Up Menu.
Step 4: Edit the size of the cylinder.

Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it to
enter Edit Parameters.
Choose Feature Dialog.
Change the values as follows:
Diameter = 15
Height = 150
Choose MB2 twice.
Choose File→Close→All Parts. Do not save the part.
Summary
In this lesson you:
• Differentiated the Absolute Coordinate System from the Work Coordinate
System. The Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate
system that defines a fixed point in model space while the Work
Coordinate System (WCS) is a mobile coordinate system that may be
moved and reoriented as necessary to support other NX functions.
• Relocated, rotated, and reoriented the WCS.
• Created a Block. You were also taught that if using a Primitive feature, it
should be the base feature and that Primitives should be limited to one in
a part because they cannot be associatively positioned.
• Changed the size of a Primitive after creation.
• Created and Edited a Cylinder.
• Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog.
Lesson
3 Positional Form Features
Purpose
This lesson introduces Form Features that can be associatively positioned
from other features.
Objectives
• Create Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove features.
• Position features.
• Edit the parameters and position of features.
Positional Form Features
Creating Form Features

Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. These
features include holes, slots, bosses, pads, pockets and grooves. Form
features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used
to create them.
Placement Face
All form features require a placement face. For a groove, the placement face
must be cylindrical or conical. For all other form features, the placement
face must be planar. This planar placement face defines the X-Y plane of
the coordinate system for the feature being created. Features are created
normal to the placement face.
A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. In the example
below, the datum plane is used as the Planar Placement face for the hole
feature.
Horizontal and Vertical Reference

The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate
system. Any linear edge, planar face, datum axis, or datum plane that
may be projected onto the planar placement face may be selected to define
the horizontal direction. The Horizontal Reference is required to define
the length direction of form features having a Length parameter (slot,
rectangular pocket, and pad). If no edge in a true horizontal direction is
available, you can specify a vertical reference and horizontal will be inferred
as being perpendicular to the selected vertical direction.
The Horizontal Reference is also required to define horizontal or vertical

types of positioning dimensions for features that do not initially require a
Horizontal Reference (holes, bosses, and cylindrical pockets).
Feature Coordinate System
During creation of features, the system will manipulate the WCS

automatically to facilitate creation of the feature specified based on the user
input provided. The coordinate system being represented is called a Feature
Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored as part of the feature definition. The
WCS will return back to the FCS orientation during subsequent feature
editing.
Positioning Form Features

Positioning Dimensions are distance values measured along the placement
face. They may be used to place the form feature at the proper location on the
placement face. These dimensions should be considered as constraints, or
rules, that the geometry must obey.
There are nine different positioning methods available on the Positioning
dialog.
1 — Horizontal
2 — Vertical
3 — Parallel
4 — Perpendicular
5 — Parallel at a Distance
6 — Angular
7 — Point onto Point
8 — Point onto Line
9 — Line onto Line
When positioning a form feature, only applicable dimension types

will be displayed.
It is not necessary to add positioning dimensions to form features but it

is recommended that they be added when features are created for ease of
future editing.
Hole
This option is used to create simple (1), counterbore (2), and

countersink (3) holes in an existing solid. The middle portion of the dialog
window changes depending on the hole type that is selected.
Hole Creation Method

• Choose the Hole icon from the Form Feature toolbar (or choose
Insert→Design Feature→Hole).
• Choose the hole type.
• Select the placement face. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse
Side button as required.
• Select the thru face if applicable.
• Key in the required parameter values (or formulas).
• Choose OK or Apply.
• Create positional dimensions as required.
Simple
Counterbored
Countersunk
Boss
The Boss feature allows the addition of a cylindrical shape to a

specified height, having either straight or tapered sides. The parameters of
the boss are diameter, height and taper angle.
• Diameter is the distance across the boss at the placement face.
• Height is measured from the placement face.
• Taper angle is the angle at which the cylinder wall of the boss inclines. A
positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the
wall is to incline. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall.
Positioning Terminology
• Fully Specified - The feature is uniquely located by the positioning

dimensions specified.
• Underspecified - The feature position is not completely constrained.
• Overspecified - The feature has had more positioning constraints

applied to it than are necessary.
• Target Solid - The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. In the
context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole, Slot, Pocket
or Groove will subtract from, or a Boss or Pad will unite with.
• Target Edge - An edge on the Target Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.
• Tool Solid - The solid representation of the feature being defined

by the current operation. In the context of a Form Feature it is the
representation of the Hole, Slot, Pocket, Pad, Boss, or Groove that will be
subtracted from or united with the Target Solid.
• Tool Edge – An edge on the Tool Solid that is selected for positioning
purposes.
Positioning Methods
Horizontal
Specifies the horizontal distance between two points, one point on the
target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Horizontal is measured
along the X-axis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. the Horizontal
Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is selected
(midpoints are not selectable).
Vertical
Specifies the vertical distance between two points, one point on

the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Vertical is measured
along the Y-axis of the feature coordinate system (i.e. perpendicular to the
Horizontal Reference). As edges are selected, the nearest valid point is
selected (midpoints are not selectable).
Perpendicular
Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the

target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. The
linear target edge is always the first pick.
In the above example the feature (hole) can be fully specified with two
Perpendicular dimensions. Features with length such as slot, pocket and pad,
will require an additional positioning dimension to control rotation.
Point onto Line
Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also
datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.
Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension with
the value automatically set to zero. This zero value can be changed to a
non-zero value when editing the feature.
Parallel
Specifies the shortest distance between two points, one point on the
target solid and the other point on the tool solid. As edges are selected, the
nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).
Point onto Point
Specifies that the distance between a point on the target solid and a
point on the tool solid is zero. This is most commonly used to align arc centers
(concentric) of cylindrical or conical features and fully constrain their location
since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features.
Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension with the
value automatically set to zero. This zero value can be changed to a non-zero
value when editing the feature.
Activity - Positioning Holes and Bosses
In this activity, you will create and position hole and boss features.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_in part and save it as

***_form_feature_1.
Step 3: Create a block as the base feature.
Verify the Type is set to Origin, Edge Lengths.
Enter the following parameters:
Length (XC) = 8
Width (YC) = 6
Height (ZC) = 3
Choose OK (or MB2).
Step 4: Create a boss.
Choose Boss. (Insert→Design Feature→Boss)
Diameter = 2
Height = .125
Taper Angle = 0
Select the top face of the block (1) as the placement face.
Choose OK (or MB2).
Notice Perpendicular is already selected.

Select edge (2) and enter a value of 4
Select edge (3) and enter a value of 3
Choose OK. (MB2)
Step 5: Create a simple thru hole.
Choose the Hole icon. (Insert→Design Feature→Hole)
Choose Simple for the hole Type.
Key in a Diameter of 1.
Select the top face of the boss (1) as the placement face.
Select the bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Choose Point onto Point.
Select the top edge (2) of the boss.
Choose Arc Center.
Step 6: Create a counterbore thru hole.
Choose Counterbore for the hole Type.
C-Bore Diameter = 1
C-Bore Depth = .5
Hole Diameter = .5
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Verify Perpendicular is selected.

Select edge (1) and enter a value of 1.5
Choose OK (MB2).
Step 7: Create another counterbore hole.
Verify that Counterbore is still selected.
Verify the following parameters:
C-Bore Diameter = 1
C-Bore Depth = .5
Hole Diameter = .5
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and the
bottom face of the block as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Verify Perpendicular is selected.

Choose OK (MB2).
Step 8: Create a simple hole.
Choose Simple
Diameter = .25
Depth = 1
Tip Angle = 0
Select the top face of the block as the placement face in the
approximate location shown (1).
Choose Apply.
Choose Horizontal .
Select a front edge (2) of the block as the
Horizontal Reference, select the edge of the boss (3) as the
target edge, and choose the Arc Center option.
Key in a value of 1.375 and press Enter.
Choose Vertical.
Select the edge of the boss again as the target edge and choose
the Arc Center option.
Key in a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.
If the placement face was selected near the right or

back of the block, the hole may be positioned on the
wrong side of the target edge. The location where
you select the placement face will determine the
initial feature location. Always select the placement
face approximately where you want the feature to
be located. If the hole is on the wrong side of the
target edge, you will have to change the positioning
dimension to a negative value.
Step 9: Create another simple thru hole that is aligned with the edges
of the front face of the block.
Verify the Simple hole type is selected.
Select the right face of the block (1) as the placement face and
left face (2) as the thru face.
Choose Apply.
Choose Point onto Line .

Select the front edge (3) of the block.
Choose Perpendicular .
Select the bottom right edge (4).
Key in a value of 1.5 and choose OK.
Step 10: Create another hole in the corner of the part.
Verify the Simple hole type is selected.
Select the top face of the block as the placement face and
bottom face as the thru face.
Choose OK.
Choose Point onto Point .

Select the back right corner of the block (1).
The completed part should appear as shown.
Step 11: Save and close the part.
Slot
This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a

milling machine tool. In each case, the shape of the cutting tool corresponds
to the slot type and dimensions.
The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the cutting tool is normal
to the face or datum plane selected. The path of the slot will be parallel to
the horizontal reference selected.
You are prompted for all necessary slot parameters depending upon the type
of slot chosen. The slot types are shown in the dialog below.
The Thru Slot option applies to all slot types and extends the length of the
slot along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference
between two specified faces.
Rectangular
This option allows creation of a slot in an existing solid body using a tool
that has cylindrical end faces and will leave sharp edges along the bottom
of the slot.
Rectangular slot parameters are Slot Width, Slot Depth, and Slot Length.
The width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical
cutting tool.
The depth of the slot is measured in a direction parallel to the tool axis
from the origin point of the slot to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must
be positive.
The length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature
coordinate system). Length values must be positive.
The system will not prompt for slot length if the Thru Slot option
has been toggled on. Instead, it prompts for selection of the two thru
faces. The two thru faces cannot be parallel to the placement face.
The figure below illustrates a T-slot using the Thru Slot option.
The other available slot profiles are shown below.
The value of the corner radius of the U-Slot must be less than
1/2 the width of the slot.
Positioning a Thru Slot

You should not dimension to the end arcs of the slot when positioning a
Thru Slot. The length of a Thru Slot is determined by the first and second
Thru Faces so the only positioning dimension required is to locate an edge
or centerline along the length of the slot (tool) to a target edge or datum.
Parallel at a Distance can be used to constrain the feature and control the
two remaining degrees of freedom.
Pocket
The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.

There are three types of pockets:
• Cylindrical
• Rectangular
• General
Only the Rectangular Pocket will be discussed in this lesson.
Rectangular Pocket
This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth,
with or without a floor and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered
sides.
The following parameters may be specified:
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge or from the centerlines
provided for this purpose.
Pad
This option allows a raised pad on a solid body to be created with or

without a taper and corner radius. The parameter values of the pad feature
are X, Y, and Z lengths, corner radius, and taper.
The two types of pads are:
• Rectangular
• General (Not covered in this course)
Rectangular Pad
The Length, Width, and Height values of the Pad feature relate directly to
the displayed vector indicating the Horizontal direction. Length is measured
along the displayed vector, Width is measured perpendicular to the displayed
vector, and Height is measured normal to the Placement face.
The Corner Radius specifies the blend radius for the vertical edges of the pad
feature (along the Height). This number may be positive or zero. A zero
radius results in sharp corners on the pad feature.
The Taper Angle is the angle at which the four walls of the pad feature
incline inward, and must be positive or equal to zero. A zero value results in
vertical walls.
Positioning Methods Continued
Parallel at a Distance
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane or
datum axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given
distance. This is typically used for features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom
necessary to fully specify a feature having a length (rotation and translation
in one direction). Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line
dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify
the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is
required to solve the final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular,
or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line
Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid
(also a datum plane or datum axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero
and they are constrained parallel to each other. This is typically used for
features with length (slot, pocket or pad).
Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary
to fully specify a feature having a length (rotational and translation in one
direction). Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension
would overspecify the location of the feature. To fully specify the feature in the
above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the
final degree of freedom (i.e. Horizontal, Perpendicular, or Point onto Line).
Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning dimension
with the value automatically set to zero. This zero value can be changed to a
non-zero value when editing the feature.
Angular
Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also a datum plane
or datum axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle
to each other. The angle is measured in a counter-clockwise direction (with
respect to the feature coordinate system), from the ends of the edges nearest
to where they are selected.
Parameter Entry Options
Parameter entry options let you easily define your model parametrically
as you specify values during feature creation.
Parameter entry options are visible as icons with down-arrows located next to
many of the parameter entry fields throughout the Modeling application.
Choosing a parameter entry option icon next to a parameter entry field lets
you specify a value based on a formula, a reference to an existing value, or
a derived value from a measurement without having to copy and paste or
reenter the values.
You can use parameter entry options to easily lookup functions and use
them to construct relationships for your features. You can use values that
already exist in your model, making downstream changes easier and in
agreement with your design intent.
Referencing Existing Parameters

Choosing the Reference option will display a Parameter Selection dialog
and allow you to select an existing feature. Once a feature is selected, it’s
parameters are listed in a dialog. Selecting one of the parameters and
choosing OK will insert it into the entry field.
Activity – Creating Pockets and Slots
In this activity, you will locate a pocket and slot using the Line onto Line and
Parallel at a Distance positioning methods.

***_form_feature_2.
Step 3: Create a block as the base feature.
Verify the Type is set to Origin, Edge Lengths.
Length (XC) = 1.25

Width (YC) = 5.625
Height (ZC) = 3.25
Choose OK (or MB2).
Step 4: Create and locate the rectangular pocket.
Choose Pocket. (Insert→Design Feature→Pocket)
Choose Rectangular.
Select the placement face (1) and horizontal reference (2) as

indicated below.
The design intent is that the length of the pocket be the same
as the Y Length of the block.
Choose the Parameter Entry Option down-arrow button.

next to the Length field and choose the Reference option.
Select the block feature from the graphics window.
Choose the BLOCK(0) Size Y parameter from the Parameter

Selection dialog and choose OK.
The parameter for the size of the block appears in the Length
field for the pocket. This “p-number” may be different in
your part.
Key in the following remaining values:
Width = 1
Depth = .25
Corner Radius = 0
Floor Radius = 0
Taper Angle = 0
Choose OK.
Choose Line onto Line and select the target (1) and the
tool (2) as indicated below.
Choose Point onto Line and select the target (3) and
the tool (4) as indicated below.
Choose Slot. (Insert→Design Feature→Slot)
Ensure that Thru Slot is off and choose Rectangular.
Select the placement face (1) and horizontal reference (2) as

indicated below.
The design intent is that the depth of the slot be the same as
the X Length of the block.
Length = 1
Width = .55
Press the Tab key to highlight the Depth field (or double-click
in the Depth field).
Choose the Parameter Entry Option down-arrow button

next to the Depth field and choose the Reference option.
Select the block feature from the graphics window.
Choose the BLOCK(0) Size X parameter from the Parameter

Selection dialog and choose OK.
The parameter, or “p-number” for the X Length of the block
will appear in the Depth field of the slot.
Choose OK.
Choose Parallel at a Distance and select the target

(1) and the tool (2) as indicated below. Enter a value of 1
and choose OK.
Choose Perpendicular and select the target (3) and the

tool (4) as indicated below. Enter a value of 1.25.
Choose OK.
Groove
The groove feature requires a cylindrical or conical placement face.

A groove can be thought of as a feature that would result from a part being
cut in a lathe. After specifying the groove parameters, you will be shown a
preview of the tool solid. The tool solid can be thought of as the path that
the lathe would make as it cuts the solid. The final step is to locate where
along the axis the cutting of the solid takes place.
Positioning a Groove
You only have to position a groove along the axis of the cylindrical or conical
placement face. No positioning dimension menu will appear. Instead, you
only need to specify a horizontal dimension along the axis. This is done by
selecting a target solid edge followed by a tool edge or centerline.
Activity - Positioning a Groove

In this activity, you will create a groove feature and position it along the axis
of a cylindrical solid body.
Step 1: Open the pau_groove_1 part.
Step 2: Start the Modeling application.
Step 3: Create and locate the groove.
Choose Groove. (Insert→Design Feature→Groove)
Choose Rectangular.
Select the outside cylindrical face as the placement face.
Groove Diameter = 2.25

Width = .25
Choose OK.
Select the front outside circular edge (1) as the target edge and
the centerline of the groove (2) as the tool edge.
Enter a value of 1.5 to position the groove and choose OK

(MB2).
Editing the Size and Location of Form Features

As features are created the parametric data is captured in expressions.
The parametric data consists of the actual feature size definition (i.e.
diameter, height, length) as well as the positional data that is captured in
the positioning dimensions. All of this data can be edited as the design of a
model continues to evolve.
Edit Parameters
This option allows the redefinition of the parameter values of any parametric
feature and causes the model to update to reflect the new values.
To edit the parameters of a feature:
• Select the feature to edit from the graphics window and choose
MB3→Edit Parameters. You must first verify that Select Features is
enabled in the Selection toolbar.
OR
Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon

(Edit→Feature→Parameters). Select the feature from the
graphics window or choose the feature name from the list in the Edit
Parameters list dialog and choose OK to confirm the selection.
• Select the parameter to edit.

– Some parameters will display on the screen where they can be selected
and edited directly.
– Any of the valid parameter types may be selected from the Edit
Parameters dialog to display the original creation dialog with the
current parameter values. Parameters may be edited in the creation
dialog.
• Choose OK to complete editing at each of the creation dialogs.
• Choose OK to complete the feature edit.
• Choose OK again to complete the model edit.
Positioning
This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions.

In addition, positioning dimensions may be added to features that are either
underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time
of creation.
Once the feature has been selected, the following options are offered based
upon the positioning status of the selected feature.
If the selected feature has no positioning dimension associated with

it, the Add Dimension option is automatically selected.
To edit the position of a feature:

• Select the feature to edit from the graphics window and choose
MB3→Edit Positioning. You must first verify that Select Features is
enabled in the Selection toolbar.
OR
Choose the Edit Positioning icon (Edit→Feature→Positioning) and

select the feature to edit.
• Choose the type of edit (Add, Edit, or Delete).
• Select an existing dimension or new dimension type.
• Complete the edit, then choose OK.
Add Dimension
This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature.

When adding positioning dimensions, any edge (1) resulting from the
intersection of the feature being positioned (2) and a face on the target solid
(3) may not be selected as the tool edge.
The intersection edge is a child object of the tool and target solid’s face and
is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being
created. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the
feature has been defined. Therefore, the intersection edge is not a valid
selection to specify location.
When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru Hole, no edges will be
selectable as the target edge because both edges are intersection edges. The
Identify Solid Face option is used to select the center of the cylindrical face (1).
Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing
in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.
For example, in the figure below the features are numbered in the order in
which they were created. Feature #2 may not be positioned using any face or
edge from feature #3.
Edit Dimension Value

Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature’s positioning
dimensions.
To use this option:
• Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension, it
is selected automatically).
• Enter the new value.
Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. Once all the desired
dimension values have been edited, choose OK.
Delete Dimension
Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. The feature
will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated
to the model.
Error Messages
If the new location of the feature causes it to miss the target solid, the
Edit During Update dialog will be presented. This dialog provides several
options for dealing with the failed update.
Editing Features with the Part Navigator
The Part Navigator is a powerful tool that may be used to identify and edit
features. Holding down MB3 on a feature node in the Part Navigator displays
a feature specific pop-up menu. This menu provides an alternative method to
edit the parameters and the position of a form feature.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the Resource bar on the
right side of the NX window.
Activity – Editing Positional Form Features
Step 1: Open the pau_edit_feature_3 part.
Step 3: Edit size parameters.
Verify Select Features is enabled in the Selection

toolbar.
In the graphics window, select the hole feature indicated below.
With the cursor over the highlighted hole feature, click MB3
and choose Edit Parameters.
Change the diameter to .375 and choose OK twice.

Notice that both holes changed. This is because a referenced
parameter was established when the second hole was created.
Step 4: Edit the position.

In the graphics window, select the same hole as before.
and choose Edit Positioning.
Choose Edit Dimension Value.
In the graphics window, select the positioning dimension that

equals 2.625 and change the value to 3.25.
Choose OK three times to finish the update.

Notice how both holes changed location. This is because a
referenced parameter was established when the second hole
was positioned.
Step 5: Change a hole type.

In the graphics window, select the counterbored hole indicated
below.
and choose Edit Parameters.
Choose Change Type.
Choose Simple and choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the Diameter value of .3125..
Choose OK again to complete the edit of the hole.
Step 6: Change the positioning design intent.

In the graphics window, select the same hole that you just
edited.
and choose Edit Positioning.
Choose Add Dimension.
Choose Perpendicular.
Select the front edge, as shown below, as the Target Edge.
Because the hole was created as a thru hole, you are limited
in what you can select for a Tool Edge. In cases where you
cannot select an appropriate tool edge or if the resulting edge
is not a true circle (like shown at one end) you can use the
Identify Solid Face option.
Choose Identify Solid Face.
Select the cylindrical face of the hole as shown below.
Accept the dimension value by choosing OK. Notice the Status

line indicates that the feature is overspecified.
This is because we have two dimensions competing against one

another. Our design intent has changed such that we want to
locate the hole from the front edge of the part so we will need to
delete the older dimension causing the overspecified condition.
Choose OK in the Positioning dialog.
Choose Delete Dimension.
Select the existing dimension causing the over-specified

condition and choose OK.
Additional Positioning Techniques
Information→Feature
There is often a need to determine detailed information about the features in
the model. By choosing Information→Feature and selecting the feature(s)
in question, an Information window will be displayed listing information
about the selected feature(s).
Accessing any of the Information pull-down menu options does not cancel
feature construction dialogs. This allows you to find necessary information
needed to associate parameters while creating new features and return to the
feature construction dialog.
Display Dimensions
Within the Information→Feature dialog the Display Dimensions option
temporarily displays the parameters of size and location in the graphics
window for the feature in question. This option makes referencing the
parameters of existing features quick and easy. Display Dimensions can
also be accessed using the Part Navigator. Refreshing the graphics window
removes the temporary display of the parameters.
Positioning from Edges

When you select an edge of the target solid to constrain a feature, a curve
is created that matches that edge. This curve is linked to the target solid.
If you modify the edge (for example, by adding a blend), the constraint is
maintained to the original edge.
Efforts should be made to position features from edges before they are
blended. This minimizes the possibility of errors when blend features are
deleted. If you create a blend and then suppress it, the edge that was blended
is redisplayed. If, after suppressing the blend, you position a feature relative
to that edge and try to unsuppress the blend, you will get a warning that the
positioning dimension will be deleted. You can use the Make Current Feature
option, within the Part Navigator, to add the feature before the blend feature.
When positioning from edges, select edges that are less likely to be
affected by downstream features and editing operations. This will
reduce the chances of future model update failures.
Summary
In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Form features are used
to add detail to the model during creation. Form features are fully associative
to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. The different
form features are: Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove.
This lesson you:
• Identified a Placement Face.
• Identified a Horizontal Reference.
• Identified Target and Tool Solids.
• Created Hole, Boss, Pocket, Pad, Slot, and Groove features.
• Applied positioning dimensions form features.
• Edited parameters and positioning dimensions of form features.
Lesson
4 Expressions
Purpose
This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions.
Objectives

• Create Expressions.
• Edit Expressions.
Expressions
Overview
Expressions are arithmetic or conditional formulas that define the
characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships
of a model.
NX automatically creates expressions when:
• a feature is created.
• a sketch is dimensioned.
• a feature is positioned.
All expressions have a single, unique name and a string or formula that
can contain a combination of variables, functions, numbers, operators, and
symbols.
Expression names are variables that you can insert in the formula strings of
other expressions. This can be helpful in breaking up lengthy formulas as
well as defining relationships that can be used in place of numbers.
Expression formulas are evaluated for values.
Here are some examples of expressions, their formulas and their resulting
values:
Expression Name Formula Value

length 5*width 20
p39 (FLANGE(6) Bend (p26+(p64*0.44))*rad((-p24)) -18.84955592
Allowance Formula)
p16 (TAPER(4) Angle) 3 3
Expression names are case sensitive and must be referenced exactly

when used in other expressions.
Expressions
Creating and Editing Expressions

To work with expressions, choose Tools→Expression.
The Expressions Dialog with Less Options
1 Expression Up to 132 letters, numbers, or underscore.

Name
Must begin with a letter.
Case Sensitive.
2 Formula Can contain a combination of numbers, functions,
operators, and other expression names.
3 Dimensionality Choose from Constant, Length, Area, Volume, Mass,
and many others
4 Units Units appropriate to the dimensionality will be
available in a pull-down.
The system will handle unit conversions automatically
if, for example, you specify inches in a metric part.
Not active during editing or if dimensionality is
constant.
5 More Options
Expressions
The Expressions Dialog with More Options
1 Listed Choose from User Defined, Named, Filter by

Expressions Name, Filter by Value, Filter by Formula, Unused
Expressions, Object Parameters, Measurements,
and All
2 Expression list List contains columns for Name (followed by usage
in the part), Formula, Value, Units, and Comment
3 Accept Edit
4 Reject Edit
5 Less Options
Creating Expressions
There are three methods to create expressions:
• System generated expressions (p#).
• User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5.00).
• Predefined, user created expressions (Thk=0.60, Thk used as a text entry

in a parameter field).
Expressions
Procedure:
• Choose the Dimensionality and Units for the expression.
• Key in the name of the expression in the Name field and press the
<Enter> key.
• Key in the formula for the expression in the Formula field and press
the <Enter> key.
• Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
After entering the name of the expression the <Tab> or = key can be
used to advance the cursor to the Formula field.
Editing Expressions
Procedure:
• Display the Expressions dialog with More Options.
• Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. The expression
will be displayed in the Name and Formula fields.
• Modify the Name, Formula, or Units of the expression.
• Press the <Enter> key or the Accept Edit icon.
• Choose Apply or OK to save the expression.
Editing the name of an expression will also edit the formula of any
expression that references it.
Listing Expressions Associated with Features
It is often necessary to determine which expressions control which features in

a model. If the Listed Expressions option is set to All, all of the expressions in
the part are listed. If an expression defines a feature, the feature name is
listed with it (i.e. p8 (SIMPLE_HOLE(1) Diameter).
All of the expressions associated with a feature may also be listed in an
Information window by choosing Information→Feature and selecting the
feature in question.
Expressions
List Referencers
The List Referencers option provides a means of finding out if an expression
is referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression.
To use this option, select the expression, and choose List Referencers from
the MB3 popup menu.
Specifying Formulas while Creating Features

The Expressions dialog may be accessed while creating a feature by choosing
Formula from the parameter entry option menu. This will allow you to
specify a complex formula for the expression that is generated for the
feature parameter. Parameter entry options are available with many of the
parameter entry fields throughout the Modeling application.
Expressions
Activity - Getting Familiar with Expressions
This activity will demonstrate the creation of expressions when a block is

created. The block will also be created with logical names for the expressions.
Step 1: Open the pau_expression_1 part and save it as
***_expression_1.
Step 3: Examine the Expressions of the Block.

Choose Tools→Expression.
Change the Listed Expressions option to All.
The dialog lists all of the expressions in the part. Notice the
default expression names p0, p1, and p2 which define the block.
Step 4: Delete the Block.
Choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar.

(Edit→Delete)
Expressions
Select the block in the graphics window and choose OK .
Step 5: Create a new Block.
Choose Origin, Edge Lengths.
Key in the following expressions:
Length (XC) = Length=8

Width (YC) = Width=6
Height (ZC) = Height=6/2
Choose OK.
Step 6: Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block.

Notice the expressions Height, Length, and Width. These
expressions are referenced in the formulas of the expressions
defining the block.
Expressions
Change the Listed Expressions option to Named.
This lists only the expressions in the part that you explicitly
named.
The formula for Height is a constant numeric value 6/2. The
desired design intent is that the Height grows proportionally
with the Width. This relationship could not be established
upon creation as the Width expression was not in existence.
Step 7: Edit the expression.

Select the Height expression from the Expressions list. This
will fill in the Name and Formula fields.
Expressions
Key in a new formula for the expression Width/2 and press

Enter.
The formula for the expression Height is now changed to

Width/2. Any time that the Width changes, the Height value
will change accordingly.
Step 8: Change the Width value.

Select the Width expression.
Key in 4 for the formula and press Enter.
Choose OK.
The block will update with the new width and height.
Expressions
Summary
Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the
characteristics of a part. All expressions have a name, a formula, and a value
and are used to define the dimensions and relationships of a model.
Expressions are created when:
• a feature is created.
• a sketch is dimensioned.
• a feature or sketch is positioned.
In this lesson you:

• Created Expressions.
• Edited Expressions.
Lesson
5 Hollow
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Hollow feature operation.
Objectives
• Hollow a solid body
• Specify faces to be pierced and an alternate thickness when hollowing a

solid body
Hollow
Hollow
The Hollow feature operation provides additional definition to an

existing solid by creating a cavity inside the solid or a shell around the
solid based upon a specified thickness. This can be accessed in the Feature
Operation toolbar or by choosing Insert→Offset/Scale→Hollow.
The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation and faces may be
selected to be pierced. In the example below, the top face was selected as
the face to be pierced.
Wall Thickness Value

Positive or negative values may be used as follows:
• Positive values will hollow the existing solid so that the wall thickness is
measured inward from the original faces of the solid.
• Negative values for the wall thickness will result in a hollow that forms a
shell of the specified value around the original solid.
Hollow
The Hollow Dialog
Choosing the Hollow icon from the Feature Operation toolbar or

choosing Insert→Offset/Scale→Hollow from the menu bar will display the
following dialog for hollow creation.
1 – Face 4 – Pierced Face 7 – Default Thickness

2 – Region 5 – Offset Face 8 – Alternate Thickness
3 – Body 6 – Type Filter
Hollow
A hollow may be created in three different ways:

• The "Face" button may be chosen to select pierced faces individually.
• The "Region" button may be selected to quickly select a region of faces to

be pierced. Since a region of the body is pierced rather than individual
faces, any changes in the region are automatically reflected in the hollow.
• The "Body" button may be selected to create a void region in a body

without piercing any faces.
Offset Face
A unique thickness may be assigned to each face with the Offset Face option.
When Offset Face is chosen, the Alternate Thickness text box becomes active.
Using alternate thicknesses for a hollow reduces the total number of features
in the part since separate offset features would not have to be created.
Hollow
Activity - Performing a Hollow Operation
In this activity, the Hollow operation will be used to define a plastic molded
part.
Step 1: Open the pau_hair_dryer_1 part.
Step 3: Inspect the Part.
Set the Display Mode to Shaded and rotate the part to

verify that the solid requires hollowing.
Step 4: Hollow the solid and pierce the proper faces.
Choose the Hollow icon from the Feature Operation

toolbar. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Hollow)
Enter a Default Thickness of 2.
Hollow
Select the right (1), and back (2) faces to pierce.
Hollow
After both of the faces are selected to be pierced, choose Apply

(or MB2 twice).
Step 5: Inspect the Part.

Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part.
Step 6: Choose File→Close→All Parts.
Hollow
Activity - Hollow and Selection Practice
In this activity, the Hollow operation will be used to define a sheet metal part.
Step 1: Open the pau_hollow_1 part.
Step 3: Create a hollow feature.
Choose the Hollow icon. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Hollow)
Enter a Default Thickness of .12.
Select the following five faces to pierce: front, back, left,

right, and bottom.
Hollow
After the faces to be pierced are selected, choose OK twice.

(or MB2 twice)
Step 4: Edit the Hollow feature.

Orient the view to the Front view and choose MB3→Update
Display.
Choose Edit Feature Parameters.

(Edit→Feature→Parameters)
Choose the HOLLOW feature and OK.
Change the Default Thickness to –.12 and choose OK three

times to update the model.
Notice the material is offset in the opposite direction.
Hollow
Activity - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset
This activity will demonstrate the application of a hollow feature with an

offset face.
Step 1: Open the pau_hollow_2 part.
Step 3: Hollow the solid.
Choose the Hollow icon. (Insert→Offset/Scale→Hollow)
Enter a Default Thickness of 4.
Select the left, right, and top faces to pierce. (These are shown
as the non-shaded faces in the figure below).
Choose the Offset Face option.
Key in an Alternate Thickness of 8.
Hollow
Select the face to offset as shown.
Choose OK.
Hollow
Summary
The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside, or a shell around an existing
solid, based upon a specified thickness. In addition, selected faces may be
assigned various offset thicknesses.
In this lesson you:
• Created a Hollow Feature Using a Default Thickness.
• Created a Hollow Feature and Specified Faces to be Pierced.
• Created a Hollow Feature and Specified an Alternate Thickness.
Lesson
6 Edge Operations
Purpose
This lesson introduces Edge Blend and Chamfer operations.
Objectives

• Create Edge Blends.
• Create Chamfers.
Edge Operations
Overview
Edge operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of
a model. These operations include Edge Blend and Chamfer.
The edge operations may also be accessed by first selecting the

edge(s) and choosing Blend or Chamfer from the MB3 pop-up menu.
To do this, the cursor selection option in the Selection toolbar must
be set to General Objects.
Edge Operations
Edge Blend
This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid
body. The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the
solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the selected edge.
Edge Operations
Creating Edge Blends
With the cursor selection set to General Objects, an edge may be blended by
selecting it in the graphics window and choosing the Blend option in the
MB3 pop-up menu. The radius can be specified by either by dragging one of
the radius drag handles (1) to the desired value or by entering the value in
the dynamic input field (2).
When you achieve the desired radius value, choose OK (or MB2 twice) to
create the edge blend.
Edge Operations
Multiple Edge Sets

A single blend feature may be applied to one or more sets of edges and each
set may have a different radius value. After the first set of edges is selected
and a radius is specified, choose the Complete set and start next set option (or
MB2 once) to select another set of edges.
The drag handles for the first edge set disappear and an anchor and label
(Set1) are displayed. You may then select edges to include in the second edge
set (Set2) and specify the radius using the new drag handles or dynamic
input field.
You may continue to define another edge set or complete the blend operation
by choosing OK (or MB2 twice).
Edge Operations
Selection Intent
The Selection Intent toolbar is available while creating an edge blend to
specify edge selection rules. These rules can be applied to automatically select
a collection of edges in a single step instead of selecting each edge individually.
Edge Operations
Edge Blend Dialog

You can access the Edge Blend dialog by choosing the Edge Blend icon from
the icon option bar in the upper left corner of the graphics window. The Edge
Blend dialog contains additional blend options.
Edge Operations
Activity - Creating Edge Blends
In this activity you will create Edge Blends.
Step 1: Open the pau_edge_blend_1 part.
Step 3: Create the first Edge Blend.
Ensure the Select General Objects icon is on in the

Selection toolbar.
Select the edge (1), click MB3, and choose the Blend option
from the pop-up menu.
Edge Operations
Key in .75 for the radius and press Enter.
Choose OK (checkmark at the upper left corner of the graphics

window) or MB2 twice to create the edge blend.
Step 4: Create the second Edge Blend.
Choose the Edge Blend icon.

(Insert→Detail Feature→Edge Blend)
In the Selection Intent toolbar, ensure the edge selection rule is

set to Add Tangent Chain.
Edge Operations
Choose the edge (1) shown below.
Notice the tangent edges are automatically selected based on

the Add Tangent Chain selection rule.
Key in a radius of .5 (or use the drag handles).
If you were to choose OK now, only the three tangent edges

would be blended. Instead, you will blend the entire left side of
the part so the additional edges must be selected manually.
Edge Operations
Select the two additional edges on the left side of the part
shown below.
Choose OK (checkmark at the upper left corner of the graphics

window) or MB2 twice to apply the blend.
Step 5: Close the part without saving.
Edge Operations
Chamfer
This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer
dimensions.
There are five methods of creating a chamfer:
• Single Offset
• Double Offset
• Offset Angle
• Freeform Single Offset (Outside scope of class)
• Freeform Double Offset (Outside scope of class)
The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid
body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Edge Operations
Single Offset
This option allows a chamfer to be placed with an offset that is the same
along both faces (offset 1 and offset 2 have the same value). This value
must be a positive.
The single offset shown is measured along the path of the curved face and
is not necessarily a linear distance.
Edge Operations
Double Offset
This option allows different offsets to be placed along the faces. Both of the
offset values must be positive and applied.
Offset Angle
This option allows an offset value and the chamfer angle to be entered. The
chamfer angle is measured from the second face selected.
An option to flip the chamfer is available if the display is not

what is desired.
Edge Operations
Activity - Performing a Chamfer Operation
In this activity, you will apply chamfers to the edges of a model.
Step 1: Open the pau_chamfer_1 part.
Step 3: Create a chamfer by specifying an offset and angle.
Choose the Chamfer icon.

(Insert→Detail Feature→Chamfer)
Choose the Offset Angle option.
Select the edge (1).
Choose OK.
Edge Operations
Key in the following parameters:
Offset = 1.75
Angle = 30
Choose OK.
Step 4: Create a double offset chamfer.

Choose the Double Offset option.
Select the edge (2).
Choose OK.
Key in the following parameters:
First Offset = .25

Second Offset = .5
Edge Operations
Choose OK and note the option to Flip Last Chamfer.
Step 5: Close the part without saving.
Edge Operations
Summary
The Edge Blend and Chamfer operations are available to provide additional
definition to the edges of a model. All of the blended edges or chamfered edges
created in a single operation are considered to be one feature.
In this lesson you:
• Blended a single edge.
• Blended edges using a selection intent rule.
• Chamfered edges using Offset Angle
• Chamfered edges using Double Offset.
• Identified the Flip Last Chamfer option.
Lesson
7 Model Construction Query
Purpose
This lesson demonstrates different methods to query a part. Querying a part
is useful to gain an understanding of the design intent and to determine
how the part was created.
Objectives
• Retrieve layer information.
• Access the Part Navigator.
• Access feature and expression information.
• Playback the model construction.
• Suppress & Unsuppress features.
• Identify where expressions are used.
• Measure the distance between objects.
Model Construction Query
Visually Inspect the Part

Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the
model to view the different features. At times this is very beneficial in order
to see clearly what is displayed on the screen. The model may be rotated
by using the middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View toolbar.
Depending upon the graphics driver being used, this may be done with the
model shaded or displayed as wireframe. These display modes may also be
controlled using the View toolbar.
Layers
Inspecting Layers
Layers are used to organize a part. They work like invisible containers to
house the different objects used to create an NX solid model.
Things to look for:
• Object Count — Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox
will change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a
Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects
contained on each layer.
• Category Names — NX offers the ability to name layers or groups of

layers using Categories. The Category Names are listed in the Category
listing window on the Layer Settings dialog as well as in the Layer/Status
listing window next to assigned layers when Show Category Names is
enabled.
• Layer Listing — There is a filtering option menu at the bottom of the

dialog that allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Objects,
Layers with Objects, or All Selectable Layers.
Layer Settings
A layer is a system-defined attribute that all objects in NX must have. Other

required attributes include color, font, and width.
A layer may be thought of as a partition in the part that objects reside in,
or on, for the purpose of organization. There are 256 layers in NX, one of
which is always the Work Layer. Any of the 256 layers can be assigned to
one of four classifications of status:
• Work
• Selectable (on)
• Visible Only
• Invisible (off)
The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible
and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work
Layer when a new part is created. When the Work Layer is changed, the
previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be
assigned a status of Visible Only or Invisible.
The number of objects on one layer is not limited. You may choose which
layers to create objects on and what the status will be. However, employing
company standards for the use of layers is recommended.
To assign a status to a layer or layers, select the Layer Settings icon from the
Utility toolbar or choose Format→Layer Settings from the menu bar.
The Layer Settings dialog appears:
Select a layer from the Layer/Status list area and choose one of the four
options below the list (Selectable, Invisible, Make Work, or Visible Only).
Double-clicking on a layer (other than the work layer) toggles it
between Selectable and Invisible.
Layers and Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Object Geometry Layer Assignment Category Name

Solid Geometry 1–20 SOLIDS
Inter-part Modeling 15–20 LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry 21–40 SKETCHES
Curve Geometry 41–60 CURVES
Reference Geometry 61–80 DATUMS
Sheet Bodies 81–100 SHEETS
Drafting Objects

Drawing Borders 101–110 FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines

Mechanism Tools 121–130 MECH
Finite Element Meshes 131–150 CAE
and Engineering Tools
Manufacturing 151–180 MFG
Quality Tools 181–190 QA
Moving Objects Between Layers
While creating a model, it may be necessary to move an object to a different

layer. This can be accomplished by choosing Format→Move to Layer. The
objects which need to be moved are selected using the Class Selection menu
and the Layer Move dialog appears.
The destination layer may be specified by entering it in the Destination Layer

or Category field or by selecting it from the layer list. Choosing OK or Apply
will move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, additional objects may be selected
to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator is useful to identify the features of the model. Selecting
a feature in the Part Navigator window will highlight that feature in the
graphics window and will also highlight its parent and/or child features in
the Part Navigator. Conversely, selecting a feature in the graphics window
will highlight that feature and its parents/children in the Part Navigator.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the Part Navigator icon on the Resource
Bar located vertically to the right of the graphics window.
The display of features can be temporarily removed (suppressed) from the

graphics window by selecting the check box next to the feature name. When a
check is present, the feature is displayed in the graphics window.
Suppress/Unsuppress and Playback

Suppress and Unsuppress are also available in the Edit Feature toolbar (or
Edit→Feature) along with a Feature Playback function. These functions
can be used to investigate how a model was created by reconstructing it
and seeing the progress graphically.
The difference between these two methods is that Playback does not suppress
reference features or sketches. However, Playback does allow editing of
features during update and Suppress/Unsuppress does not.
Information
The Information pull down menu offers a number of options to obtain
information about the model.
Information→Feature
This is used to identify Parent/Child relationships between the selected
feature and the other features in the model. In addition, expressions that
control the feature may be displayed in the graphics window by toggling
on the Display Dimensions option. Choosing OK or Apply will display the
Information window with the geometric data and associated expressions.
The feature may also be selected in the graphics window and will
then highlight in the Feature Browser window.
Information→Object
This is used to display information about selected objects in an Information
window. Any type of geometric object may be selected including curves, edges,
faces, and bodies. The Information window will display information such as
name, layer, color, object type, and geometric properties (length, diameter,
start and end coordinates, etc.).
Information→Expression→List All
This lists all expressions in the part in the Information window. From the
Information window, the list can be printed or saved to a text file.
Information→Expression→List All by Reference

This is used to identify expressions that reference other expressions and the
features that they define. The Edit→Find option within the Information
window can be used to search for a specific expression.
Referenced Expressions
If an expression defines a feature directly, the feature name is listed with it in
the Expressions dialog. However, an expression may also be included in the
formula of other expressions. The referencing expressions and features may
be identified by using the List Referencers option in the Expressions dialog.
To use this option:
• Choose Tools→Expression
• If necessary, change the Listed Expressions filter to list the expression

to interrogate.
• Select the expression and choose List Referencers in the MB3 pop-up
menu.
An Information window will list the features and other expressions that
are referencing the selected expression.
Analysis Distance
The Distance option can be accessed by choosing Analysis→Distance or the
Distance icon from the Analysis toolbar. This option is used to obtain the
minimum distance between any two objects such as points, curves, planes,
bodies, edges, and/or faces.
An icon option bar appears in the upper left corner of the graphics window
with options to select the first point or object (1) and the second point or
object (2).
After selecting the two objects, a temporary ruler and measurement result
are displayed in the graphics window.
Choosing the Information option will display the result in an Information

window along with the closest point on each object and the delta distances
relative to the work and absolute coordinate system.
Activity - Model Construction Query

In this activity, you will identify feature relationships and design intent.
Although detailed instructions are provided, it may be beneficial to attempt
to navigate through the interface without using them.
Step 1: Open the pau_arm_1 part.
Step 3: Visually inspect the model.

Inspect the model. As the part is rotated, try to identify different
features and the possible methods used to create them.
Choose the Shaded icon. (MB3→Display Mode→Shaded)
Rotate the model (MB2).
Choose the Trimetric icon to orient the view back to the

trimetric orientation. (MB3→Orient View→Trimetric)
Step 4: Inspect the layers.

Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of the
complexity of the model. If there is only one object on a “solids”
layer and a few objects on a “curves” layer, the model is likely
an extrusion.
Choose Layer Settings. (Format→Layer Settings)
Toggle on the Show Object Count option.
Toggle on the Show Category Names option.
Review the listing for category names and object count.

Notice that there are objects on a Solids layer, a Sketches
layer, and a Datums layer.
Choose the Wireframe icon to better view interior

features. (MB3→Display Mode→Wireframe)
Make layers 21 and 61 selectable so that the construction

geometry may be seen.
Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog.
Choose Fit. (MB3→Fit)
Step 5: Identify the features using the Part Navigator.
Choose the Part Navigator icon from the resource bar

on the right side of the graphics window.
Choose the push pin icon in the upper left hand corner of
the Part Navigator to permanently display it. If the graphics
window is maximized, the display will be adjusted to fit the
part within the viewing area.
Choose Tools→Part Navigator and ensure the Timestamp

Order option is toggled on. This will list all features in the
Model History tree of the Part Navigator.
Select EXTRUDE “large knuckle extrusion” in the Part

Navigator Model History.
The corresponding feature will be highlighted in the graphics
window. The parent feature (SKETCH “S21”) and child
(SIMPLE_HOLE “large thru hole”) will highlight in the Part
Navigator.
Select a few other features in the Part Navigator to identify

them and their parent/child relationships.
Step 6: Review the model construction using Playback.
Choose the Feature Playback icon from the Edit

Feature toolbar. (Edit→Feature→Playback)
All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference

features and the sketch. The Edit During Update dialog
informs you that the FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) feature has
been updated, this is the first feature in the model history.
Choose the Step option.

The next feature, FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(1), is updated. You
may have to move the slider to read the entire message
displayed in the Edit During Update dialog.
Choose the Step option again.

The next feature (FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(2)) is updated.
Continue to Step through the model until all features have

been updated.
Step 7: Review the model construction using Suppress and Unsuppress.

Starting at the top of the Part Navigator Model History
list, select the check box in front of the first feature
(FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0)) to suppress it.
Notice that all of the features in the list except for the two
fixed datum axes are also suppressed. This is because all of
the other features in the model are children of the suppressed
datum plane.
Select FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) in the Part Navigator.
Choose the Dependencies option at the bottom of the Part

Navigator
In the Dependencies area, expand SKETCH ”S21”.

Now you can see how the various features are dependent
on the datum plane.
Choose the Dependencies option to close the area.
Step 8: Unsuppress the features.

Starting at the top of the Part Navigator Model History list,
select the "empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with
MB1 to unsuppress the feature.
Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining features,

one at a time, by selecting each of the empty check boxes
with MB1.
Step 9: Find the values that control the thickness of the web extrusion.
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor on
EXTRUDE “web extrusion”, press MB3, and choose
Information.
Scroll through the Information window to see the various

parameters and controlling expressions.
The expression p4 is identified as the Both Side Distance.
This expression controls the start and end distances from the
section geometry for the extrusion. A value of .125 on both
sides produces a web thickness of .25.
Note that the parent of this feature is the sketch
S21:SKETCH(3).
Close the Information window.
Step 10: Identify the expression that controls the distance from the large
hole center to the small hole center.
Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry, the
obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to
hole distance is in the sketch.
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor on SKETCH “S21”,

press MB3, and choose Edit Parameters.
Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar.
The expression in question can clearly be identified as

arm_length=8.500.
Orient the view back to the Trimetric orientation.
Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog.
Step 11: Close the Part Navigator.
Select the push pin icon again and drag the cursor off
the Part Navigator to hide it.
Step 12: Determine how the large thru hole is positioned.

You will select a feature directly from the graphics window rather
than from a list which will take less time if you do not know the
name of the feature.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphics window and
accept it if necessary. You can zoom, pan or rotate the part to
get a better view of the feature.
Choose MB2.
The Information window appears and shows that p18 is a
parallel positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero). The
logical assumption can be made that the hole is located Point
to Point relative to the Large Knuckle extrusion.
This can be confirmed by the following actions.
Choose the Edit Positioning icon from the Edit Feature

toolbar. (Edit→Feature→Positioning)
Select large thru hole(7) and choose MB2.

The p18 expression appears at the arc center of the extrusion
and hole. If you don’t see the expression, rotate the part.
Cancel the Edit Positioning dialog.
Step 13: Identify where an expression is referenced.
Change the Listed Expressions filter to Named.
Select the small_dia expression.

This expression is listed as defining
(S21:SKETCH(3) Diameter Dimension on Arc2)
Choose List Referencers from the MB3 pop-up menu.

The Information window appears and also shows that another
expression is referencing it (large_dia=2.5*small_dia).
Cancel the Expressions dialog.
Step 14: Identify the arc in the sketch that is referencing the expression.
Choose Information→Feature.
Select S21:SKETCH(3).
Choose the Object Dependency Browser option.

The child objects of the sketch are listed. Notice that Arc2
is present.
Select Arc - Arc2.

The arc is highlighted in the graphics window. The feature and
object associated with the expression have now been identified.
Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog.
Step 15: Measure a distance.
Choose Layer Settings. (Format→Layer Settings)
Make layers 21 and 61 invisible and choose OK.
Choose Analysis→Distance.
For the first object, select one of the upper edges of the web.
For the second object, select one of the lower edges of the web.
The shortest distance between the edges is displayed.
Summary
In this lesson, you queried a model to determine the creation method and
design intent. These skills are important to review parts created by other
users.
In this lesson you:
• Accessed the Part Navigator.
• Identified expressions.
• Reviewed the model construction using Playback.
• Reviewed the model construction using Suppress and Unsuppress.
• Identified where an expression was used.
• Measured a distance.
• Modified layer settings.
Lesson
8 Introduction to Assemblies
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Assembly application.
Objectives
• Set Load Options.
• Work with the Assembly Navigator.
Introduction to Assemblies
Definitions and Descriptions
Assembly
An assembly is a part which contains component objects. It is a
collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies. In the figure
below, the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many components.
Subassembly
A subassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level
assembly. The figure below shows the subassembly of the integrated circuit
board for the toy laser gun. A subassembly has components of its own.
Component Objects
A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the
assembly back to the master component part.
A component object can also be a subassembly made up of other component
parts and/or component objects.
Shown below are a few of the component objects (1) in the subassembly. Every
piece of the integrated circuit board is a separate component object.
Component Parts
A component part is a part which is pointed to by a component object within

an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is
referenced, not copied, by the assembly.
The term “piece part” is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside
of an assembly.
Introduction to Load Options

When an assembly part is opened (loaded) using File→Open, the system must
find and load any component parts that are referenced by the assembly. Load
Options establish how and from where the system loads the component parts.
The Load Options dialog is accessed by choosing File→Options→Load Options.
1 — Determines where to look

for component parts.
2 — Determines which
components will be loaded.
3 — Controls whether
components are fully or
partially loaded.
4 — Controls what to do if a
component is not found.
Load Method
The Load Method determines where the system will search for the component
parts when an assembly is opened. There are three possible settings.
• As Saved — looks for each component part in the same directory it was
in when the assembly was last saved.
• From Directory — looks for each component in the same directory as

the assembly part.
• Search Directories — looks for each component in directories specified

in a user-defined list.
Load States
The Load Options also control whether component parts will be fully loaded,
partially loaded, or unloaded when an assembly is opened. These are referred
to as Load States.
Fully Loaded
A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory.
All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option
to All Components and toggling off the Use Partial Loading option before
opening the assembly.
Partially Loaded
When a part is partially loaded, only the data required to display the part is
loaded into memory. Components will be partially loaded if the Use Partial
Loading option is toggled on when the assembly is opened.
Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves
performance. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies.
Unloaded
A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened.
Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load
Components option to No Components before opening the assembly. This
will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system
performance but the component geometry will not be visible.
Individual components or subassemblies may be opened at a later time when
they are needed.
Load Failure
The Abort Load on Failure option controls how the system behaves if a
component part is not found, based on the current load method.
• When toggled on, no parts are loaded unless all of the components are
found. The first component that cannot be found will be listed in an
error window.
• When toggled off, the assembly is loaded along with any of the components
that are found. Those components that are not found will be listed in a
warning window and left unloaded.
Activity - Setting Load Options
In this activity, you will see how the setting of the load options impacts the
opening of assembly components.
Step 1: Set the Load Options to As Saved.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Verify Load Method is set to As Saved.
Verify Abort Load on Failure is toggled off.
Choose OK.
Step 2: Open the test assembly.
Open the pau_test_assm_1 part from the laser_gun

subdirectory.
A warning appears informing you that a directory could not
be found.
The system is trying to locate each component in the directory
in which it resided when the assembly was last saved. The
components may have been moved to a new directory or the
original directory may no longer exist. The warning would also
occur if you did not have read access to the original directory.
Choose OK to dismiss the warning.
Choose File→Close→All Parts.
Choose Yes in the Close All Parts dialog.
Step 3: Set the Load Options to search for component parts in the same
directory as the assembly part.
Choose File→Options→Load Options.
Set the Load Method to From Directory.
Choose OK.
Step 4: Open the test assembly.
Open the pau_test_assm_1 part from the laser_gun

subdirectory.
If a warning appears informing you that the parts are read

only, choose OK to dismiss the warning.
Step 5: Review the list of components in the assembly.

Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.
Scroll through the Information window and confirm that all of
the component parts are located in the same directory as the
assembly part.
Step 6: Do not close or save the part. You will use this assembly in the
next activity.
The Assembly Navigator

The Assembly Navigator provides a graphical display of the structure of the
displayed assembly and provides a quick and easy method of manipulating
components in the assembly.
The Assembly Navigator may be accessed by choosing the Assembly
Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of the graphics window.
You may re-size the Assembly Navigator window and use the scroll
bars to see the entire tree structure and all of the columns.
Node Display
Each component of an assembly is displayed as a node in the assembly tree

structure. If you select on a node with MB1, the system will highlight the
component geometry in the graphics window.
Each node consists of a check box, an icon, the part name, and additional
columns. If the part is an assembly or subassembly, an expand/collapse box
will also be present.
Components may be selected for various operations by choosing the
appropriate node in the Assembly Navigator with MB1.
Icons
Assembly (or subassembly) — If the icon is yellow, the assembly is

within the work part. If the icon is gray with solid edges, the assembly is a
non-work part. If the icon is gray with dashed edges, the assembly is closed.
Component Piece Part — If the icon is yellow, the component is within

the work part. If the icon is gray with solid edges, the component is a
non-work part. If the icon is gray with dashed edges, the component is closed.
Expand/Collapse Box — Children of a node are only displayed when it

is expanded. To expand or collapse the node, place the cursor over the box
and click MB1. When a node is collapsed, the expand/collapse box is marked
with a +. An expanded node is marked with a — .
Check Boxes
The check box provides a quick means of determining a part’s status. A check
box also lets you load and show a part with a single action.
No check — The part is closed. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Loads the component and its children partially or fully, depending on the
load options. Unloaded parents may also be loaded at this time.
• Any components that were blanked are now unblanked.
• Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children will contain red
check marks except for those which fail to load, are excluded from a
reference set, or reside on invisible layers.
Gray check — The part is blanked, and at least partially open. It also
appears for unblanked parts which either have an excluded reference set or
are on invisible layers. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Unblanks the component, along with any of its children that were blanked.
• If any of its children were unloaded, they are now loaded.
• Afterwards, the check boxes of the part and its children have large red
checks, except for those whose loading failed, who have an excluded
reference set, or are on invisible layers.
Red check — The part is unblanked, at least partially open, in a visible

reference set, and on a visible layer. Clicking on this type of check box:
• Blanks the component and its unblanked children.
• Afterwards, the component’s check box has a gray check and its children
have gray checks (if blanked) or no checks (if unloaded).
You cannot close a part by clicking on its check box. To close a part, use the
File→Close option or the Close option in the Assembly Navigator pop-up
menu.
Activity - Working with the Assembly Navigator

In this activity, you will work with the Assembly Navigator.
Continue working with the pau_test_assm_1 assembly.
Step 1: Review the nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
Choose the Assembly Navigator icon from the resource bar
on the right side of the graphics window.
Expand the pau_ic_board_13 node by clicking on the + sign.
Step 2: Blank and Unblank a component node.

Click MB1 on one of the pau_ic9_13 nodes.
Notice the component highlights on the screen.
Click the check box in front of the highlighted node.

Notice the component has been blanked.
Click on the check box again to unblank the component.
Step 3: Blank and Unblank a subassembly node.

Click the check box in front of the subassembly
pau_ic_board_13.
Notice the subassembly and all of its components are blanked.
Also notice the color of the check marks become gray.
Click on the subassembly check box again to unblank the

subassembly.
Step 4: Close a component.

Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.
At the top of the dialog, change the File List Filter to

All Parts in Session.
Select pau_ic9_13 from the list and choose OK.

In the Assembly Navigator, the pau_ic9_13 nodes no longer
have check marks in their boxes and the components are no
longer displayed in the graphics window. This means that the
components are not loaded.
Step 5: Open the components using the check box.

In the Assembly Navigator, click on the check box in front
of either pau_ic9_13 nodes.
Both occurrences of the pau_ic9_13 component are now open
and are once again displayed in the graphics window.
Step 6: Do not close or save the part. You will use this assembly in the
next activity.
Selecting Components in the Assembly Navigator
In many assembly functions, components may be selected from a list in a

dialog or from the graphics window. You may also select components using
the Assembly Navigator by choosing the appropriate node with MB1. You can
select single or multiple components. When selection is complete, you can
process the components in the list by choosing OK from the dialog.
To select multiple components in the Assembly Navigator, select the first
component and then either:
• Use <Shift>MB1 (together) on another component to select all the
components between those components
• Or use <Ctrl>MB1 on another component if you want only it and the

first component
You can also use <Shift>MB1 on components in the graphics window or

<Ctrl>MB1 on components in the Assembly Navigator to deselect them.
Identifying Components
In the Assembly Navigator, if you click MB1 while the cursor is over a
non-work part whose check box has a red check, that part is highlighted. The
part remains highlighted until you select another part. (Hovering the cursor
without clicking MB1 has no effect.)
Check boxes of components that are not visible will have a thin gray check
or no check.
If you hover the cursor over a part that is not visible (e.g., blanked, on
another layer, or unloaded), a box defining the boundaries of the component
appears in the graphics window. The box disappears when you move the
cursor to another part. This only occurs when the Preselect Invisible Nodes
property is toggled on.
The Preselect Invisible Nodes property is accessed by clicking MB3
in the Assembly Navigator away from the component nodes and
choosing Properties from the pop-up menu.
Because of configuration differences, you may have to hold MB1
down for a few seconds before the box displays. In some cases, the
box may not be drawn until you release MB1. Also, the box will not
be drawn if you double-click MB1.
Designing in Context
Designing in Context is the ability to directly edit component geometry as

it is displayed in the assembly. Geometry from other components can be
selected to aid in the modeling.
The Displayed Part

NX allows multiple parts to be open at the same time either implicitly as a
result of being referenced by a loaded assembly or explicitly through the use
of File→Open. The part that is currently displayed in the graphics window,
whether it be an assembly or component, is called the Displayed Part.
There are several ways to change the displayed part:
• Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu. (First choose the Select Components option in the Selection
toolbar.)
• Choose the Make Displayed Part icon from the Assemblies toolbar.
• Choose Window→More (Change Window dialog).
• Choose Window and selecting a part from the Loaded Part List, which
contains up to the last ten loaded parts.
• Use the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.
• Choose Assemblies→Context Control→Set Displayed Part.
Selection Toolbar
The Select Components option in the Selection toolbar may be used anytime
the selection of a component is required. This supports an object/action
approach, where the component is selected first from the graphics window
and then the necessary action is defined.
The Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.
The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate

the selection of components.
1 — Reset 3 — Deselect All

2 — Select All 4 — Up One Level
Once a component has been highlighted in the graphics window, the MB3
pop-up menu may be used to choose an available action for that component.
The cursor must be on top of the component for the component-specific
pop-up menu to appear.
The options available in the component pop-up menu will vary

depending on whether the Assemblies and Modeling applications
are on.
Window
Choosing Window→More will display the Change Window dialog which lists
all partially and fully loaded parts other than the current displayed part.
When this dialog is active, a part may be selected by:

• Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. You may enter a portion of the
part name in the Search Text field to help find the part in the list. The
Options button can be used to specify how to perform the search.
• Selecting geometry in the graphics window (if the current displayed

part is an assembly).
• Selecting the node in the Assembly Navigator.
The Work Part

The part in which geometry is created and edited is defined as the Work Part.
The Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is
contained in the displayed assembly part.
When a part is opened, it will initially be both the displayed and the work
part. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. In
the case where the displayed part is not the work part, the work part will be
displayed in color and the other component parts will be de-emphasized.
There are several ways to change the work part:
• Double-click on the component in the graphics window. (First choose the
Select Components option in the Selection toolbar.)
• Select the component from the graphics window and use the MB3 pop-up
menu. (First choose the Select Components option in the Selection
toolbar.)
• Choose the Make Work Part icon in the Assemblies toolbar.
• Use the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.
• Choose Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part.
When a component is made the work part, the component’s reference

set is changed to Entire Part. When the component is no longer the
work part, the reference set is returned to its original condition.
Selection Toolbar
The selection toolbar may be also be used when selecting a component to
change the work part.
Once the component has been selected from the graphics window, the MB3
pop-up menu may be used to make it the work part. The cursor must be on
top of the component for the component-specific pop-up menu to appear.
The options available in the component pop-up menu will vary

depending on whether the Assemblies and Modeling and Assemblies
are on.
Make Work Part Icon
If a component has already been selected, choosing the Make Work

Part icon will immediately make it the work part.
If no component has been selected, choosing the Make Work Part icon will
display the Set Work Part dialog.
While this dialog is active, a part may be identified by:

• Choosing it from the list of loaded parts.
• Selecting geometry from the graphics window.
• Selecting the part node from the Assembly Navigator.
• Entering the part name in the Part Name entry field.
Choosing the Displayed Part option changes the work part back to the
displayed assembly. This makes the displayed part and the work part the
same.
Assembly Navigator Pop-Up Menu Options
If you position the cursor over a node in the Assembly Navigator that
represents a component and click MB3, a pop-up menu appears.
The options available in the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu will

vary depending on the status of the component and whether the
Assemblies and Modeling applications are invoked.
Pack or Unpack
Pack removes multiple occurrences from the Assembly Navigator display and
replaces them with a single node. (Multiple occurrences are components with
the same parent, and whose prototype is the same part.) Unpack reverses
this process and shows all occurrences.
Make Work Part

Selects the part in which to create new geometry or edit existing geometry,
giving you the ability to design in context.
Double clicking on a node in the Assembly Navigator will also make
that component the Work Part. In addition the reference set is
changed to Entire Part. When the component is no longer the work
part, the reference set is returned to its original condition.
Make Displayed Part

Switches the display between currently loaded parts. The displayed part
becomes the top node in the Assembly Navigator.
Display Parent
Switches the displayed part from a component or an assembly to one of its
parent assemblies.
The Maintain option in the Assembly Preferences dialog
(Preferences→Assemblies) determines the work part when a
parent becomes the displayed part. If Maintain is toggled on, the
component will remain the work part. If Maintain is toggled off, the
parent becomes the displayed part and work part.
Activity – Working with the Assembly Navigator (cont.)

In this activity, you will use the Assembly Navigator to navigate through the
assembly structure.
Continue working with the pau_test_assm_1 assembly.
Step 1: Review the nodes in the Assembly Navigator.
If the Assembly Navigator is not visible, choose the Assembly
Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of
the graphics window.

Notice that there are several nodes of the same component.
Packing the nodes will make the assembly structure easier
to view.
Step 2: Pack like nodes in the Assembly Navigator.

In the Assembly Navigator, locate the pau_cl_13 nodes.
On any of the pau_cl_13 nodes, click MB3 and choose Pack.
In the Assembly Navigator, select one of the pau_ic9_13 nodes.
Click MB3 and choose Pack.
Pack all of the pau_r_13 nodes.
Pack all of the pau_diode_13 nodes.
You can also choose MB3→Pack All with the cursor

on a header or on any open space in the Assembly
Navigator.
Step 3: Make one of the pau_cl_13 components the work part.

In the Assembly Navigator, select pau_cl_13x4 with MB3
and choose Unpack.
Double-click on anyone of the pau_cl_13 nodes.
Choose OK to the Read Only message.

All of the components in the graphics window change to the
same color except for one of the pau_cl_13 components, which
remains in its original color. This color convention denotes
pau_cl_13 as the work part. The component may now be edited
and the design continued in the context of the assembly.
Step 4: Make pau_tl_13 the displayed part.

You may not want to work on a component in the context of the
assembly. If this is the case, you would make the component
the displayed part.
Verify Select Components is set in the Selection toolbar.
Select the component pau_tl_13 from the graphics window

as shown below.
Place your cursor over the highlighted component, press MB3

and choose Make Displayed Part.
The pop-up menu may contain additional options if

the Assemblies application is toggled on.
The assembly is no longer displayed.
Step 5: Display the top level assembly.

In the Assembly Navigator, click MB3 on the pau_t1_13 node
and choose Display Parent→pau_test_assm_1.
The Maintain option in the Assembly Preferences dialog

(Preferences→Assemblies) determines the work part
when a parent becomes the displayed part. If Maintain is
toggled on, the component will remain the work part. If
Maintain is toggled off, the parent becomes the displayed
part and work part.
Step 6: Close all parts and do not save.
Saving the Work Part

After editing, the work part must be saved to keep the modifications. This can
be performed with the File→Save or the File→Save Work Part Only option.
File→Save
• If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component), only that part
will be saved.
• If the work part is an assembly or subassembly, all modified component

parts below it are also saved. Higher level assemblies will not be saved
even if they were modified.
File→Save Work Part Only

The Save Work Part Only option will only save the work part, even if the
work part is an assembly or subassembly.
File→Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been
modified regardless of the work part designation.
Open parts for which you do not have write privileges will not
be saved.
Summary
An assembly is a part which contains component objects. It is a collection
of pointers to piece parts and/or subassemblies.
Assemblies provides the ability to design in context.
In this lesson you:
• Set Load Options.
• Worked with the Assembly Navigator.
Lesson
9 Adding Components & Mating

Conditions
Purpose
This lesson demonstrates adding components to an assembly and the
associativity that may be designed between components with mating
conditions.
Objectives
• Add components to an assembly.
• Define mating conditions.
• Reposition components.
Adding Components & Mating Conditions
General Assembly Concepts

There are two basic ways to define an assembly structure.
• Top-Down Modeling
• Bottom-Up Modeling (Demonstrated in this course)
Top-Down Modeling
As the name suggests, an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and
parts are filed down the hierarchy, creating subassemblies and components.
Bottom-Up Modeling
A Bottom-Up assembly modeling approach starts by creating the lowest level
piece parts that will make up the assembly. Existing component parts and
subassemblies are added to assemblies as the process moves up the assembly
level hierarchy.
In the Bottom-Up approach, component parts are created separate from
the assembly and later added to the assembly. This approach applies to
purchased parts or existing parts.
All assemblies are automatically updated, when opened, to reflect changes

made to the component parts. For example, if a hole feature is added to the
solid in a component part, it will be seen in all occurrences of that component
in the assembly when it is opened.
Combining Both Approaches

It may be more practical for the methods to be combined. For example,
purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the
bottom-up method, new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a
top down mode as the design progresses, and finally existing fasteners may
be added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library.
Designing in Context
The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving
the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed
in context. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. Edits
can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part.
If a component exists several times in the assembly (i.e. a fastener), any
change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other
occurrences as well.
Assemblies Application
The Assemblies application may be turned on from the Application toolbar or
from the Application pull-down menu. Toggling on the Assemblies application
checks out an Assemblies license, displays the Assemblies toolbar, and
expands the functions available in the Assemblies pull-down menu.
Assemblies Pull-down Menu
Turning on the Assemblies application will expand the Assemblies pull-down

menu (1). Some assemblies functions are still available when the Assemblies
application is toggled off (2).
Assemblies Toolbar
Turning on the Assemblies application will also display the Assemblies

toolbar.
If the Assemblies toolbar is not visible, choose Tools→Customize and toggle

it on in the Toolbars page.
You can control which icons appear on this toolbar by choosing
Add or Remove Buttons→Assemblies from the Toolbar Options as shown in a
docked (1) and undocked (2) toolbar. This will list all of the available options
in the toolbar and allow you to toggle on those which you want to display.
Adding Components to an Assembly
A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the

Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or choosing
Assemblies→Components→Add Existing from the menu bar. The Assemblies
application must be toggled on to access this option.
The component part to add can be specified with the Select Part dialog.
There are several ways to identify a part when the Select Part dialog is active:
• Select the Choose Part File button to retrieve an unopened part.
• Select a previously loaded part from the list.
• Enter the name of a previously loaded part.
• Select an existing component in the graphics window.
• Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator.
After the part is identified, the Add Existing Part dialog appears. This dialog
is used to specify how the existing part will be added as a component object to
the assembly and what information will be stored with the component object.
Reference Set - Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from
each component and viewed in the context of the assembly.
• Default reference sets are Empty and Entire Part.
• Reference sets may be manually or automatically created.
For a "BODY" reference set to be created automatically, the Model

Reference Set Name option must be set to BODY in the customer
defaults settings. (File→Utilities→Customer Defaults and then
choose Assemblies→Site Standards)
Layer Options - Defines the layer to which the objects in the new component
will be added in the current work part.
• Work - Places all objects from the component part on the current work
layer.
• Original - Places each object from the component part on the same layer
in which it resides in the component part.
• As Specified - Places all objects from the component on the layer

specified in the Specified Layer entry field.
Activity – Creating an Assembly

In this activity, you will create an assembly and the add a component.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_in part and save it as ***_clevis_assm.
Step 3: Activate the Assemblies toolbar.
Make sure the Assemblies application is toggled on.

(Application→Assemblies)
Choose Tools→Customize→Layout and choose Reset

Layout to capture the icons in the assemblies toolbar.
Close the Customize dialog.
Step 4: Add a component to the assembly.

Choose Add Existing Component from the Assemblies
toolbar. (Assemblies→Components→Add Existing)
Choose Choose Part File.
Select pau_clevis_1 and choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the defaults in the Add Existing Part

dialog.
Choose Reset to ensure that the coordinates are set to zero.
Choose OK in the Point Constructor dialog.
Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog.
Step 5: Verify the presence of the assembly and component parts.

If the Assembly Navigator is not visible, choose the Assembly
Navigator icon from the resource bar on the right side of

The Assembly Navigator contains two nodes that represent the
top level assembly and the component part.
Step 6: Save and close the parts.
Mating Conditions
By applying mating conditions to components in an assembly, you establish
parametric, positional relationships between objects in the components.
These relationships are termed mating constraints.
In the example shown, if you align the cylindrical face of a bolt to the
cylindrical face of a hole in a block and then move the hole, the bolt will
automatically move with it.
A mating condition is made up of one or more mating constraints. There are

eight types of constraints.
1 — Mate 4 — Parallel 7 — Distance

2 — Align 5 — Perpendicular 8 — Tangent
3 — Angle 6 — Center
FROM / TO
When selecting objects to mate, the cue line will be directing you
to select FROM and TO objects. The FROM object is part of the component
that is going to move to a new position. The TO object is part of the
component that is remaining in its present location.
Mate Constraint
When applying the Mate constraint to components using planar faces

and datum planes, the objects will be oriented so that their normals are
parallel and point in opposite directions. The components will not necessarily
have physical contact but will be coplanar. By definition, a face normal in a
solid body points away from the solid.
When mating non–planar faces (i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to

spherical) the radii must be the same; for conical to conical faces, the taper
must be the same.
Align Constraint
When you apply the Align constraint to components using planar

objects (planar faces and datum planes), the objects will be oriented so that
their normals are parallel and point in the same direction. The components
will not necessarily have physical contact but will be coplanar.
When aligning non–planar faces, i.e. cylindrical to cylindrical, spherical to

spherical, or conical to conical, the radii and/or taper do not have to be the
same.
The Align constraint can also be used to position an edge or curve object of
a component with a planar object (planar face or datum plane) of another
component. A vector will be determined from the edge or curve object and
the objects will be oriented so that the vector and the planar object lie on the
same plane (same behavior as with mate constraint).
Using the CSYS Filter

The Align constraint allows existing coordinate systems to be used as
FROM/TO selection objects. When using the CSYS option, select the FROM
CSYS and then immediately select the TO CSYS. This constraint will remove
all DOFs between the two components.
Angle Constraint
Use the Angle constraint when you need to control specific angles
between objects of components.
The example below illustrates an angle constraint that is being applied in
conjunction with two other constraints. The two planar faces of the blocks
must always be coplanar by virtue of the Mate constraint. The pivot for the
Angle constraint is determined by the Align constraint that is applied to
the two edges.
Parallel Constraint
Use the Parallel constraint when you need to establish parallelism

between objects of components. Objects that have surface normals associated
to them will be oriented parallel based on those normals.
When applying the Parallel constraint to position a planar object of a
component (planar face or datum plane) with an edge or curve object of
another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object.
The vector and the planar object’s normal will then become parallel.
Perpendicular Constraint
Use the Perpendicular constraint when you need to establish

perpendicularity between objects of components. Objects that have surface
normals associated to them will be oriented perpendicular based on those
normals.
When applying the Perpendicular constraint to position a planar object of a
component, (planar faces and datum planes), with an edge or curve object of
another component; a vector will be determined from the edge or curve object,
that vector and the planar object’s normal will then become perpendicular.
Center Constraint
Use the Center constraint to center 1 or 2 objects of a component to 1

or 2 objects of another component.
Center Objects 1 to 1
Procedure
• Choose the Center constraint.
• Set the Object filter.
• Specify the number of objects to use (Center Objects 1 to 1, 1 to 2, 2

to 1, or 2 to 2).
• Select the objects as instructed in the cue line.
Distance Constraint
Use the Distance constraint to define a distance between two geometric

objects. The sign (+/-) of the dimension controls which side of the object the
solution is on.
Tangent Constraint
Use the Tangent constraint to define a physical contact between two

geometric objects. There can be multiple solutions to a tangent constraint.
To specify which solution is desired, a help point will be computed from
the pick position on the surface and used to find a unique solution to the
tangent constraint.
The following are some examples of tangent constraints:
• Point on Surface.
• Line tangent to Surface.
• Plane tangent to Sphere.
• Plane tangent to Cylinder.
Constraint / Object Matrix

Cylindrical Spherical Conical Toroidial
Point Line Circle Plane
Face Face Face Face
Point
Mate Align
Angle
Line Mate
Parallel
(Datum Align
Perpend.
Axis) Distance
Center
Distance
Mate Align Mate Align
Mate Angle Angle
Align Parallel Parallel
Circle Center Perpend. Perpend.
Distance Center Center
Tangent Distance Distance
Tangent Tangent
Mate Align
Mate Align Mate Align
Plane Angle
Mate Angle Angle
(Planar Parallel
Align Parallel Parallel
Face) Perpend.
Center Perpend. Perpend.
(Datum Center
Distance Center Center
Plane) Distance
Distance Distance
Tangent
Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align
Mate Angle Angle Angle Angle
Align Parallel Parallel Parallel Parallel
Cylindrical
Center Perpend. Perpend. Perpend. Perpend.
Face
Distance Center Center Center Center
Tangent Distance Distance Distance Distance
Tangent Tangent Tangent Tangent
Mate
Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align
Align
Spherical Center Center Center Center Center
Center
Face Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
Distance
Tangent Tangent Tangent Tangent Tangent
Tangent
Mate
Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align
Conical Align
Center Center Center Center Center Center Center
Face Center
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
Distance
Mate
Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align Mate Align
Toroidial Align
Center Center Center Center Center Center Center
Face Center
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
Distance
The Mating Conditions Dialog
Mating conditions are applied from the Mating Conditions dialog and can be
accessed by choosing the Mate Component icon in the Assemblies toolbar or
by choosing Assemblies→Components→Mate Component from the menu bar.
1 — Mating Conditions Tree Listing
2 — Mating Constraint Types
3 — Selection Steps
4 — Expression Value (for Angle and Distance constraints)
Defining Mating Constraints

• Choose the type of constraint to apply.
• Select the Filter type (optional).
• Select an object FROM component to be mated (component you are

moving).
• Select an object on the component to mate TO (component that will

remain stationary).
• Choose Preview and then choose Apply (the dialog remains to let you add
more constraints).
or
• Choose OK to accept the constraint and dismiss the dialog.
Vary Constraints
The Vary Constraints option can be used to reposition the active component
in the Mating Conditions dialog. Existing mating constraints will limit the
freedom of movement. This dialog is similar to the Reposition Component
dialog. A different component can be selected and repositioned by choosing
the Select Component icon.
Degree of Freedom Indicators

Temporary arrows are displayed to indicate the remaining degrees of freedom.
The Show Degrees of Freedom/Remove Degrees of Freedom options in the
Mating Condition pop-up menu may be used to turn on and off the display
of these arrows.
A Mate constraint applied to the faces shown below, constrains the small
block in the direction normal to the faces. The small block is still free to
translate and rotate in the plane that the two shaded faces have in common.
Preview
The Preview option becomes active after all the objects have been correctly
selected for a constraint. This option lets you preview the solution by
actually moving the component based on the existing constraints. Additional
constraints may still be applied. After previewing the constraint, choose
Apply or OK to accept the constraint or continue creating another constraint.
If the constraint is not correct, choose Unpreview and use the Selection Steps
to define different FROM and TO faces.
List Errors
If there are no degree of freedom indicators visible and the Preview option
is unavailable, you may have tried to define an invalid mating constraint.
This will activate the List Errors option. Choosing it will present information
about the error. The constraint must be deleted and recreated.
OK, Apply, and Cancel Buttons
• OK — This should be selected only after all constraints have been applied.
This will save the mating condition (and its constraints) and dismiss the
Mating Conditions dialog.
• Apply — This will apply the constraint and the dialog will remain open.
• Cancel — This will dismiss the dialog without saving any of the
constraints you added.
Tree Listing
The Mating Conditions Tree Listing list all of the assemblies mating
conditions and constraints. Several options and viewing preferences may
be controlled from the Listing Tree.
1 — Mating Condition expanded to display constraint
2 — Mating Constraint suppression toggle
3 — Mating Condition
4 — Mating Constraints
5 — Mating Constraint pop-up menu
Suppress/Unsuppress
Mating Conditions or individual Mating Constraints may be suppressed or
unsuppressed using the check box.
• A suppressed mating constraint is ignored during geometric edits.
• If a mating constraint is being unsuppressed, the mating condition must

be solved again.
Mating Constraint Pop-up Menu

The mating constraints pop-up menu is activated by placing the cursor on a
mating constraint and pressing MB3.
• Alternate Solution – Produces any other solution that is applicable
to the selected constraint.
• Convert To – Allows the constraint to be changed to another applicable

constraint, i.e. Mate to Distance.
• Delete – Removes the selected mating constraint.
• Rename – Allows the renaming of a mating constraint.
Mating Condition Pop-up Menu

The mating condition pop-up menu is activated by placing the cursor on a
mating condition and pressing MB3.
Highlight/Unhighlight – will highlight or unhighlight the current condition.

• From – Highlights the FROM object for all constraints of the selected
condition.
• To – Highlights the TO object for all constraints of the selected condition.
• With/Without Direction – Controls the display of the object normal

or direction vectors.
Show/Remove Degrees of Freedom – Controls the display of the

remaining Degrees of Freedom (DOF).
Suppress/Unsuppress – Controls the suppression status of the selected

condition. Can also be performed by using the suppression toggle in front of
the condition name.
• A suppressed mating condition is ignored during geometric edits.
• No error messages will be displayed for suppressed mating conditions.
• If you modify a component creating a failed constraint, that constraint

must be deleted before the mating condition can be unsuppressed.
Delete – Removes the selected mating condition.

Rename – Allows the renaming of a mating condition.
Remember Constraints – Mating constraints may be saved for a selected
mating condition within the assembly part. This allows “learned” or
automatic mating when the same component is added to the assembly again.
Repositioning Components
The Reposition Component option may be used on a component that

does not have any mating conditions, has suppressed mating conditions, or
is only partially constrained. If the component is partially constrained, its
mating constraints will be enforced within the reposition function.
To reposition a component choose the Reposition Component icon from
the Assemblies toolbar or choose Assemblies→Components→Reposition
Components from the menu bar.
Transform Options
The Reposition Component dialog includes the following transform options:
1 — Point to Point
2 — Translate
3 — Rotate About a Point
4 — Rotate About a line
5 — Reposition
6 — Rotate Between Axes
7 — Rotating Between Points
Move Objects or Move Handles Only

These radio buttons let you specify whether you want to move the component
along with the drag handles or just the drag handles. The drag handles can
be repositioned to a specific orientation and used to drag the component along
a specific vector direction or about a specific axis.
Distance or Angle
The Distance input field (or Angle field if a rotation is being defined) lets you
define a distance (or angle) for movement.
Snap Increment
Snap Increment allows snapping to “whole-multiple” distances when using
the direction or rotation drag handles.
Vector Method
Provides options to define a vector when moving a component using one of
the direction drag handles.
Snap Handles to WCS

Provides a means for moving the handles to the origin and orientation
of the current WCS.
Motion Animation
This slider lets you specify how finely the motion is animated (from Fine to
Coarse) during the motion that you have defined.
Collision Action
Specifies what the system will do if a collision occurs.
• None — no action is taken.
• Highlight Collision — you can continue moving the components, and the
areas that collided are highlighted.
• Stop Before Collision — the motion stops just before a collision occurs.
The distance between the components when the motion stops depends
on the setting of the Motion Animation slider. The closer the slider is
to Fine, the shorter the distance.
Collision Checking Mode

Allows you to specify what types of objects will be checked for clearance
while repositioning.
Repositioning Components Using Drag Handles

Components can be repositioned quickly and easily using drag handles.
When the Reposition Component dialog is displayed, the graphics window
displays a set of handles.
There are several ways to reposition a component with the drag handles.
• To move the origin of the component to a specific point, select the origin
drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and then select a destination point.
The destination points that can be selected are determined by the Snap
Point toolbar.
• To drag the component to an arbitrary cursor location, select the origin

drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and drag to a new cursor location
while holding down MB1.
• To translate the component along an axis, select a translation drag handle

(cone head) and drag the component while holding down MB1.
• To rotate the component about an axis, select a rotation drag handle

(filled circle) and drag the component while holding down MB1.
• To orient the component to a saved coordinate system, select the origin

drag handle (filled square) with MB1 and then select the saved coordinate
system.
The Move Handles Only option is used to first move the drag
handles to a specific orientation before using them to move the
component.
Activity - Mating the Nut Cracker Components

In this activity, you will assign mating constraints to components of a nut
cracker assembly. Most of the component parts have already been added to an
assembly. In consideration of available class time, the smasher plate, base,
mount, ramrod, and hinges have already had mating conditions applied to
them.
Apply associative relationships between components so that
changes in size and shape to an individual component part will
update the locations of adjacent components in the assembly.
Step 1: Open the pau_nut_cracker_assm part and save as
***_nut_cracker_assm.
1 – Crank 4 – Ramrod 7 – Base

2 – Shaft 5 – Smasher Plate 8 – Mount
3 – Link 6 – Hinges
Step 2: Start the Modeling application and toggle on the Assembly

application.
Step 3: Change the display of the Hidden Edges to visible for easier
recognition of faces.
In the graphics window, click MB3 (not on a component) and
choose Hidden Edges→Visible from the pop-up menu.
Step 4: Assign mating conditions between the Mount and the Shaft.
Choose Reposition Component.

(Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component)
Select the Shaft component and click MB2.
Select the square drag handle (origin) and while holding

down MB1, drag the shaft to the location shown below, release
MB1, and choose OK.
Choose Mate Component.

(Assemblies→Components→Mate Component)
Choose Center.
Notice that the From Selection Step is

active.
The cue line reads: “Select object FROM component to be

mated.” Select the cylindrical face of the shaft component
as shown below.
The Selection Step advances to the TO object and the Cue

line reads: “ Select object on component to mate TO”.
Select the cylindrical face of the Mount component as shown

below and choose Preview.
Choose Apply. The constraint is applied and the selection
step returns to From.
Choose Distance.
Select the planar face of the Shaft component as shown below.
Select the face of the Mount component as shown below, key in

a Distance Expression value of 1.5, and then choose Preview.
Choose Apply and then Cancel.
Step 5: Assign mating conditions between the Shaft and the Crank
components.

Choose Align.
Select the planar face of the Crank component as shown below.
Select the planar end face of the Shaft component as shown

below and choose Preview. The shaft is oriented to meet the
constraint although it has not been applied yet.
Choose Apply. The previous constraint has now been applied.
Choose Center.
Select the cylindrical face (1) of the Crank component as

shown below.
Select the cylindrical face (2) of the Shaft component as shown

above and choose Preview and then choose Apply.
Choose Parallel.
Select the internal planar face of the crank as shown below.
Select the planar face on the Shaft component as shown below

and then choose Preview.
The shaft and crank are oriented to reflect the constraint.
If the planar faces are flipped 180 , choose the Alternate

Solution option and then choose OK. If the planar faces are
oriented properly, choose OK until the Mating Conditions
dialog is dismissed.
Step 6: Add the pau_nc_arm component to the assembly.

Choose Add Existing Component from the Assemblies
toolbar. (Assemblies→Components→Add Existing)
Choose Choose Part File.
Select pau_nc_arm and choose OK.

The Component Preview window appears and displays the part.
In the Add Existing Part dialog, ensure that:
Reference Set = Body

Positioning = Mate
Layer Options = Original
Choose OK.
Choose Center.
In the Preview window, select the cylindrical face as shown

below.
In the main graphics window, select the cylindrical face of the

shaft as shown below.
Choose Distance.
In the Preview window, select the planar face of the Arm

component for the FROM selection as shown below.
In the main graphics window, select the planar face of the

Shaft component for the TO selection as shown below, enter a
Distance Expression of -.25 and press Enter.
Choose Apply.
Choose Parallel.
Select the internal planar face of the Arm component as

shown below.
Select the planar face of the Shaft component as shown below

and then choose Preview.
If the planar faces are flipped 180 , choose Alternate Solution

and then choose Apply. If the planar faces are oriented
properly, choose Apply.
Cancel the Mating Conditions dialog.
Step 7: Reposition the crank component to see the effect of the mating
conditions applied so far.
Choose Reposition Component.

(Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component)
Select the crank component and choose OK.
Select the square drag handle (origin) and holding down MB1,
drag the crank around in a circular motion and verify that
the shaft and the arm rotate.
Choose MB2 to cancel the repositioning.
Step 8: Assign mating conditions between the Arm and Link components.

Choose Center.
Select the cylindrical face of the link (1) shown below for the
FROM selection.
Select the cylindrical face of the arm (2) shown below for the
TO selection.
Choose Apply to apply the constraints.
Step 9: Assign mating conditions between the link and the ramrod.
Set the Center Objects filter to 2 to 2.
Note that in the following constraint you will be selecting

four faces.
1 — FROM
2 — TO
3 — Second FROM
4 — Second TO
Select the faces below in the order indicated:

1 — FROM
2 — TO
3 — Second FROM
4 — Second TO
The orientation of your components may differ than

the illustrations below.
Choose Apply.
Set the Center Objects filter to 1 to 1.
Select the faces below as indicated:

1 — FROM
2 — TO
Choose Apply.
Cancel the Mating Constraints dialog.
Step 10: Visually verify the mating constraints.

Orient the view to the Trimetric view
(MB3→Orient View→Trimetric).
Shade the model.
Choose Reposition.
(Assemblies→Components→Reposition
Component)
Select the crank component and accept with MB2.
Drag the crank around using the handles.

Notice how the components move based on the constraints that
have been assigned to them.
Step 11: Save and close all parts.
Summary
Assemblies may be created using the Top-Down, Bottom-Up, or a combination
of the two methods.
By applying mating conditions to components, you were able to relate their
locations and orientations in an assembly.
The Reposition Component option may be used in preparation for mating
components.
In this lesson you:
• Added components to an assembly.
• Defined mating conditions.
• Repositioned components.
Lesson
10 The Master Model
Purpose
This lesson introduces the Master Model concept.
Objectives
• Review an existing Master Model.
• Edit a Master Model and observe the automatic update of a non-master

part.
• Create a new Master Model.
The Master Model
The Assembly Modeler

An assembly is a part containing stored links to other part that are pieces
of the assembly. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the assembly
resides in the original part only, there is no duplication in the assembly part.
A link in the assembly part is referred to as a component object. A component
object stores information about the piece part such as its location, attributes,
origin, orientation, permissions, degree of display, and its relationship to
other parts.
The Master Model Concept
Applying the Master Model Concept in a Drafting situation is simply the

creation of an assembly consisting of one component part. It is valuable as a
means of promoting concurrent engineering. The person responsible for the
design of a part is not the same person responsible for all of the downstream
applications performed on the part. These downstream applications may
include drafting, manufacturing, analysis, etc.
The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of
the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. The downstream
user will have write privileges to the assembly part, but only read privileges
to the model. The solid model is referenced for the application work, but the
downstream user will not have the ability to change it.
Because the application information in the assembly or non-master part is
referencing the original master model part, edits to the master model will
be updated in the non-master part.
Implementing Master Model theory allows diverse yet dependent design
processes to access the same master geometry during development.
Therefore, the entire part creation process becomes more efficient allowing
many disciplines to work at the same time and allowing master model edits
to be automatically updated in non-master parts.
The Master Model
The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design

processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development.
Each application uses a separate assembly part. When the Master Model is
revised, the other applications will automatically update with minimal or
no associativity loss.
The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained
through protection of the Master Model.
The Master Model
Master Model Example
Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices, define

machining operations, and designate cutter tools and save this data in their
models.
By creating a manufacturing "assembly" and adding a component to it, they
can then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate
part which references the master geometry:
• This avoids duplication of model geometry
• Different users can work in separate parts simultaneously
The manufacturing engineer has ownership of the assembly part without

necessarily having write access to the master model which is owned by the
designer.
The Master Model
Activity - Exploring a Master Model Assembly
This activity will demonstrate the advantages of a Master Model Assembly.

Step 1: Choose File→Options→Load Options and ensure that the Load
Method is From Directory.
Step 2: Open the pau_tapedisp_dwg part.

Make sure that you are selecting pau_tapedisp_dwg.
Step 3: Choose Drafting. (Application→Drafting)
Step 4: Inspect the drawing for dimensional values.

Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of .88 (1)
and the corner radius of .13 (2). Both dimensions have been
rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.
The Master Model
Restore the view and note the drawing name, SH1, at the lower
left corner. (MB3→Restore)
Step 5: Investigate the model.
Choose Modeling. (Application→Modeling)
Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no

features.
Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no

expressions.
Cancel the Expressions dialog.
Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components.

The Information window appears showing the assembly
structure for pau_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is
one component named pau_tapedisp. This part contains the
Master Model definition.
Step 6: Examine the display.

Choose Information→Object. Place the cursor over the
solid body. When the cursor changes to the cross with the
ellipsis (+...) select once. Pass the cursor over the numbers
in the QuickPick window until the solid body is highlighted,
then select it.
The Master Model
Choose OK. (MB2)

The Information window appears with information regarding
the solid, its owning part, and confirmation that it is a
component.
Step 7: Open the Master Model part.
Choose Open. (File→Open)
Choose the pau_tapedisp part and OK.
Step 8: Edit the expression for Roll_width.

The Master Model
Changed the Listed Expressions option to Named.
Select the Roll_width expression.
Replace the .875 Formula with .75 and choose OK.
The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate

the modified dimension.
Step 9: Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.

The Master Model
Select the BLEND(21) feature near the bottom of the list

and choose OK.
Key in a new value of .06 for the radius value in the input
field (Set1 R).
Choose OK.
Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog.
Step 10: Change the Displayed Part to pau_tapedisp_dwg.

Choose Window→pau_tapedisp_dwg to change the
Displayed Part.
Choose Drafting. (Application→Drafting)

Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to
remind you the views are not updated.
The Master Model
Step 11: Update the drawing.
Choose Update Views from the Drawing Layout

toolbar. (Edit→View→Update Views)
Choose All in the Update Views dialog and choose OK.
Step 12: Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master
model reflected on the drawing
The Master Model
Activity - Creating a Master Model Assembly

This activity will demonstrate creation of a Master Model Assembly.
***_master_1_dwg where *** represents your initials.
Step 3: Add the master model to the discipline specific assembly part.
Check to see the Assemblies application is toggled on.
(Choose Application→Assemblies if it is not already on).
Choose the Add Existing Component icon.

(Assemblies→Components→Add Existing)
Choose the Choose Part File button.
Choose pau_master_1 from the parts directory, then OK.
Set the following options:
Reference Set = BODY

Positioning = Absolute
Layer Options = Original
Choose OK.
Choose Reset and then choose OK in the Point Constructor

dialog to locate the component at the work coordinate system
origin.
Step 4: Choose Save. (File→Save)
Step 5: Close all parts. (File→Close→All Parts)
The Master Model
Summary
This Master Model approach offers many benefits to NX customers. Master
model parts may be write-protected and owned by one user or group yet the
data can be shared with other users or groups. Downstream users can access
the latest data and incorporate updates as the part is being developed.
Lesson
11 Introduction to Drafting
Purpose
This lesson will introduce the Drafting application.
Objectives

• Open, Create, and Delete drawings.
• Add, Edit, and Remove Views on Drawings.
• Modify Preferences.
• Create Utility Symbols.
• Create Dimensions.
• Create Annotations.
Introduction to Drafting
The Drafting Application

You can use the Drafting application to quickly create drawings of 3D parts.
Drawings are populated with views that do not need to be defined before
the views are placed on the drawing.
Some of the benefits of the Drafting application are:
• You can add views to the drawing just by indicating their location with
the cursor.
• When you add orthographic views, they will automatically be aligned with
the parent view as you create them.
• Every view is fully associated with the solid. If the solid is updated, the
views will also be updated.
• Drafting annotation is placed directly on the drawing.
• Drafting annotation (dimensions, labels, and symbols with leaders) is

fully associative to the geometry you select, and will update automatically
if there are changes in the solid model.
• Fully associative view boundaries are automatically calculated when

the drawing is updated.
• Section views are fully associative to the solid model.
Creating New Drawing Sheets

Upon entering the Drafting application, you will either see an existing
drawing, or—if there are no drawing sheets in the part yet—you will be
given the Insert Sheet dialog so that you can specify the parameters for a
new drawing sheet.
To create a new drawing sheet, define the drawing parameters: drawing
sheet name, size, scale, units of measure and projection angle. Once the
desired parameters have been set, choosing OK replaces the current display
with a view of the new drawing of the specified size.
There are a few different ways to create a new drawing sheet in a part that
already contains drawing sheets.
• Choose the Insert Sheet icon from the Drawing Layout toolbar.
• Choose Insert→Sheet from the menu bar.
• Use MB3 over the drawing node in the Part Navigator and choose
Insert Sheet from the pop-up menu.
Activity - Creating New Drawing Sheets
In this activity, you will create new drawing sheets in an existing part that
has no drawing sheets.
Step 1: Open the pau_drf_arm_1_dwg part.
This is a non-master part. The master model part (pau_drf_arm_1)
was added as a component.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application and create a new drawing sheet.
Choose the Drafting icon. (Application→Drafting)

Because there are no existing drawing sheets in this part, the
Insert Sheet dialog appears.
Verify the following settings in the Insert Sheet dialog.

• Default drawing name is set to SH1.
• Inches option is on.
• Default drawing size is set to E - 34 X 44.
• Scale is set to 1:1 (1 over 1).
• Projection is set to 3rd Angle Projection.
Choose OK.
In the graphics window, the dashed lines define the border of
the new E size drawing sheet. The name of the drawing sheet
appears in the lower left hand corner.
Step 3: Invoke the saved toolbar settings.

Toolbar settings for the Drafting application has been saved for
you.
Choose Tools→Customize.
If a warning appears asking if you want to reset all changes

made to the menu bars and toolbars, choose Yes to continue.
Choose Close.
Step 4: Add another drawing sheet.
Choose the Insert Sheet icon from the Drawing Layout

toolbar. (Insert→Sheet)
Verify that the default drawing name is set to SH2.
Choose OK to accept the defaults.

The name in the lower left corner of the graphics window
shows that you have created a second drawing sheet. The Part
Navigator will also list the existing drawing sheets in the part.
Opening a Drawing
There are a few ways to open a drawing:
• In the Part Navigator, double click the sheet name or, use MB3 over the
drawing sheet node and choose Open from the pop-up menu.
• Choose the Open Sheet icon and select the sheet name from a list.
• Choose Format→Open Sheet and select the sheet name from a list.
To open a drawing, select from a list of previously created drawings. You

can either select the desired drawing name from the list or enter a specific
drawing name in the Drawing Sheet Name text field.
If there are multiple drawings in the part, you can filter the list to include a
specific series of drawings.
Activity - Opening a Drawing Sheet
In this activity, you will open a drawing using the “filter”.

Step 1: Open the pau_drf_edit1_dwg_2 part.
The drawing sheet 93A12345–6 is displayed.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application. (Application→Drafting)
Step 3: Open drawing sheet SH1.
Open the Part Navigator .
With the cursor over the Sheet “SH1” node, choose

MB3→Open.
Drawing sheet SH1, appears in the graphics window.
Step 4: Use the Open Drawing Sheet dialog to display a specific drawing
sheet.
Choose the Open Sheet icon on the Drawing Layout

toolbar. (Format→Open Sheet)
You can use the filter to limit the number of drawing sheets
displayed in the listing window.
Double–click on drawing sheet 93A12345-6.
Close all parts and do not save.
Editing a Drawing
NX uses the word "drawing" to define a collection of views. Think of each
drawing as a separate page in the part. One part can contain many pages, in
other words, many drawings.
To edit a drawing, you can:
• Choose the Sheet icon from the Drafting Edit toolbar.
• Choose Edit→Sheet.
• Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the drawing sheet and choose
Edit Sheet from the pop-up menu.
• Select the dashed-line border of a drawing sheet with MB3 to access the
pop-up menu and choose Edit Sheet.
The current state of the displayed drawing affects the options that are
available. You should be aware of the following:
• The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on the
current drawing being modified.
• You can edit the drawing to a larger or smaller size. You can even edit the
drawing to a size small enough so that a portion of a view falls outside
the boundary of the drawing. However, if you edit the drawing to a size
so small that a member view falls entirely outside the boundary of the
drawing, you will get an error message.
• If you need to edit the drawing to a smaller size, but cannot due to the
current position of the views, you will first have to move the views closer
to the drawing’s origin at the lower left corner of the drawing.
Deleting a Drawing
There are a few different ways to delete a drawing sheet:
• Choose the Delete Sheet icon.
• Choose Edit→Delete Sheet.

A Delete Sheet dialog lists of drawings eligible for deletion. The name of
the current drawing sheet will not be in the list and cannot be deleted
using the dialog.
• Select the dashed-line border of the drawing sheet with MB3 then choose
Delete from the pop-up menu. This will delete the current drawing sheet.
• In the Part Navigator, select the drawing node with MB3 and choose
Delete.
Activity - Editing a Drawing

In this activity, you will modify the current drawing name, size and scale.
Step 1: Open the pau_drf_edit1_dwg part.
This is a “master model” drawing of the “pau_drf_edit1” part.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application. (Application→Drafting)

The drawing sheet 93A12345–5 is displayed.
Step 3: Rename the current drawing.

The name of this drawing must be changed to “93A12345–6”.
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet
node 93A12345–5, then choose MB3→Rename.
Place the cursor to the right of the “5”, backspace once, then
key in 6. Press Enter.
Step 4: Change the current drawing size.

This drawing needs to use a non-standard size of 594 X 1100
millimeters. Whenever you enter separate height and width values
in the two fields, the system will ignore the default drawing size.
In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet
node 93A12345–6, then choose MB3→Edit Sheet.
Double-click in the Height field, and key in 594. In the

Length field, enter 1100.
Choose Apply.
The drawing changes to display the new size.
Step 5: Change the current drawing scale.

The drawing scale establishes the default scale at which the
drawing views are placed. It is represented in a fractional format
with two text fields arranged as a numerator and denominator.
The drawing is currently displaying the views at 1/2 full size (1 in
the top scale field and 2 in the bottom scale field).
In this case you want every view on this drawing sheet to display
the part full size.
Leave the top Scale field set to 1. Change the bottom Scale
field to 1, then choose OK.
All the views that are present on the drawing assume the new
scale. Also note that the positions of the drawing views do
not change with the scale.
Drawing Monochrome Display

Monochrome displays a drawing in a single color. You may specify the line
and background colors.
You can use the Monochrome Display option by:
• Choosing Preferences→Visualization and then choose the Color Settings
tab.
Then toggle on the Monochrome Display option in the Drawing Part

Settings section.
The four color selections become active.
The default colors are black, and gray, but any color may be selected.
The Show Widths option displays line widths.
• In the Part Navigator, place the cursor over the drawing sheet node and
use MB3 to select Monochrome from the pop-up menu.
The Monochrome Display will take on the color selections already

defined through the Visualization Preferences dialog.
View Preferences
The display of views is controlled by choosing the View Preferences

icon or Preferences→View.
You can then use the View Preferences dialog to define the display of hidden
lines, silhouettes, smooth edges, as well as section view background lines, etc.
The Centerlines option automatically creates linear, cylindrical, and

bolt circle centerlines for views where the axis of the cylindrical face is
perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing sheet.
Hidden Lines
If you toggle the Hidden Line option off, Hidden Line is not performed and all
hidden lines in the view will appear as solid lines.
If you toggle the Hidden Line option to on, the color, font, and width of the
hidden lines are determined by the settings in the Color/Font/Width menus.
The color option is not applicable in Monochrome mode.

Widths are displayed only if Show Widths is toggled on in the
Preferences→Visualization dialog.
Edges Hidden By Edges

The Edges Hidden By Edges option controls the display of edges which are
hidden by other overlapping edges. If this option is toggled off, edges hidden
by other edges are erased from the view.
Smooth Edges
Smooth edges are those whose adjacent faces have the same surface tangent
at the edge where they meet.
If you toggle the Smooth Edges option on, you can use the Color/Font/Width
settings to specify their appearance. You can also use the End Gaps option to
vary the edge intersection appearance.
Virtual Intersections
The Virtual Intersections option allows you to display imaginary intersection

curves as required by the JIS standard (section 6.13) and the ISO 128-1982
standard (section 5.2.2). The Virtual Intersections option is used when you
want to display the curves in a member view that show where blended faces
theoretically intersect. The color, font, and width of virtual intersections can
be controlled when the Virtual Intersections option is toggled on.
The virtual intersection curves only display if the original surfaces

joined or intersected before they were blended.
Adding a Base View

The first view to add to a drawing is the Base View. Other views will be
projected from the base view. A drawing can have more than one base view.
There are several ways to add a base view.
• In the graphics window, place the cursor over the dashed line that
represents the drawing border and choose Add Base View from the MB3
pop-up menu.
Add Base View is the default option (bold) in the pop-up menu.
So, the base view can be added simply by double-clicking on the
drawing border.
• In the Part Navigator, select a drawing sheet node and choose Add Base
View from the MB3 pop-up menu.
• Choose the Add Base View icon in the Drawing Layout toolbar.
• Choose Insert→View→Base View.
When using any of these methods, click in the graphics window to place the
base view on the drawing.
View Creation Options Bar
After choosing Add Base View option, the View Creations Option Bar appears
in the upper left corner of the graphics window.
1 Style — Provides the same set of parameters as the View Preferences

option. However, when these options are set from this toolbar they
are specific to the view that is being placed on the drawing.
2 View — Determines the orientation of the base view. A pull-down
menu list the canned views and any custom views that have been
created.
3 Scale — Provides a means to set the scale of the base view. A
pull-down menu list several preset scales as well as the options to
enter a custom scale or define the scale by an expression.
4 Orient View Tool — Provides a means to orient a view to a
orientation that is not listed in the View pull down menu.
5 Move View — This option only appears on the toolbar if there is
already a view on the drawing. This option allows you to move
existing views during the operation of adding a new view.
Orient View Tool

When the Orient View Tool is selected a preview screen is presented along
with several options to orient the model as desired.
1 – Rotation Tool 2 – View Plane Tool 3 – Horizontal Direction

4 – Associative Orientation 5 – Reset 6 – Reverse Direction
Adding Projected Views

Immediately after placing a base view on the drawing, you may create a
projected view from the base view by moving the cursor off the base view.
A projected view may also be created from a view that has been previously
placed on the drawing. This is accomplished by placing the cursor over a
view’s border, when it highlights click MB3, from the pop-up menu choose
Add Projected View.
Projection Lines
Once the cursor is moved off the base view the system displays projection
lines. The view may be projected at any angle from the base view however,
the system will snap at 45 increments.
Preview
As you move the cursor around on the drawing the new view may be
previewed as a view border, wireframe, Hidden Wireframe, or shaded image.
To select a preview option click MB3 and choose Preview Style.
1 – Projection lines
2 – Border preview of new projected view.
View Creation Options Bar

During the creation of a projected view the View Creation Options Bar is
displayed in the upper left corner of the graphics screen with several different
options. Displayed below the bar is the Offset dynamic input box.
1 Style option provides the same set of parameters as the View

Preferences option. If this option is not used the new view will inherit
the style of its parent view.
2 Base View option allow the user to choose a different base view then
originally selected.
3 Hinge Line may be used to define and associative projection. The
projected view is 90 to the defined hinge line.
4 Vector Constructor pull down becomes active if Hinge Line has
been selected.
5 Reverse Direction changes the projection direction from the hinge
line.
6 Move View allows you to move existing views during the operation
of adding a new view.
7 Offset value is used to space the projected view from the
parent view. The value is applied from the center of
the views. The input box is made active by choosing
MB3→Cursor Tracking while adding a projected view.
To apply a value: Key in the value and press Enter.

To Reset: Press Backspace and then Enter.
Editing Existing Views
Editing Style
The style of an existing view may be changed by:
• Double-clicking on the view border or choosing MB3→Style on the view
border.
• Double-clicking or choosing MB3→Style on the drawing view node in

the Part Navigator.
• Choose Edit→Style.
Moving a View
A view may be dragged around the drawing by placing the cursor over the
border of the view, when the cursor changes to drag mode, hold MB1
down and move the view as required. As you move the view in proximity to
another view, alignment lines will appear to aid in the positioning of the
view. The alignment lines will appear relative to the top, bottom, left, right,
or center of the view.
Removing Views From a Drawing

To remove views from a drawing, you can:
• Select the view border with MB3; choose Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Use MB3 in the Part Navigator to highlight the view to be removed, and
select Delete from the pop-up menu.
• Choose the Delete icon and select the view.
• Choose Edit→Delete and select the view.
Once a view is removed from a drawing, all drafting objects or view

modifications associated to that view are deleted.
Activity - Adding Views to a Drawing

This activity will guide you through the steps of adding a base view, projecting
views, editing views, and creating a simple section.
Step 1: Open the pau_drf_bearing_mount_dwg part and save it as
***_bearing_mount_dwg where *** represents your initials.
Step 2: Start the Drafting application.
Step 3: Add a Base View.

Place the cursor over the edge of the drawing border and
double-click.
The View Creations Option Bar appears and the top view is
selected by default. You will use this view for the base view.
Click MB3 and choose Preview Style→Wireframe.
Choose the Style icon in the View Creations Option Bar.
Choose the General tab.
Verify that Centerlines is checked and key in a scale of .5.
Choose the Hidden Lines tab.
Verify that Hidden Line is checked and the font is set to

Invisible.
Choose OK.
Locate the view in the upper left corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
Step 4: Project a Front view.

Move the cursor straight below the base view so that the
alignment line is vertical.
Locate the view in the bottom left corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
Press MB2 to exit the Add Projected View function.
Step 5: Project a Right view off the Front view.

Place the cursor over the Front view’s border; it becomes
highlighted.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor to the right of the Front view so that the
alignment line is horizontal.
Locate the view in the bottom right corner of the drawing by

clicking MB1.
Press MB2.
Step 6: Project an auxiliary view.

Place the cursor over the Right view’s border.
Click MB3 and choose Add Projected View.
Move the cursor around the Right view from the 12:00 to
the 9:00 position.
Notice that approximately at approximately the 10:00 position,
a face in the Top and Front views highlight as well as the
corresponding edge in the Right view. If you select a location
with these faces highlighted you will create a true auxiliary
view of that face.
Select a location as shown below.
Press MB2 to exit.
In some cases, you may have to explicitly define a hinge

line for an auxiliary view. You can do this by choosing
the Hinge Line option from the View Creation Options
Bar and selecting an edge of the part.
Creating Utility Symbols
The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines, offset center

points, target points, and intersection symbols.
When you choose the Utility Symbol icon (or Insert→Symbol→Utility
Symbol), the Utility Symbols dialog displays. This dialog allows you to specify
settings that control the utility symbol as you create it. You can also use this
dialog to modify existing symbols.
The Utility Symbols dialog consists

of four areas:
1 — Symbol Icons
2 — Point Position Options
3 — Symbol Display Parameters
4 — Preference Options
Point Position Options

You can determine a symbol’s placement by selecting an object (or objects)
from which to create the utility symbol. When you select an object, the
system evaluates the desired location relative to that object based upon
the setting of the position option.
1 — Control Point
2 — Intersection Point
3 — Arc Center
4 — Cylindrical Face
You can select up to 100 points to define a linear centerline, circular

centerline or bolt circle.
The Cylindrical Face option allows you to place cylindrical or symmetrical

centerlines by choosing the desired cylindrical or conical face, even if it is
hidden inside the solid.
Multiple Centerlines
This option, when toggled on, allows you to create multiple linear or
cylindrical centerline symbols without having to choose Apply after each
object is selected.
You can only apply multiple cylindrical centerlines when the point position
option is set to Cylindrical Face. That’s because the system assumes the
cylindrical objects are all oriented in the same manner and are of the same
length.
Using the Inherit Option

You can set the symbol preferences by choosing the Inherit option. This
allows you to select an existing symbol from which to inherit preferences.
When the symbol is selected, the preferences matching those of the selected
symbol will be set in the dialog and will be used to create a new symbol.
Inherit can also be used to edit the display of an existing symbol. To do this,
you would select the symbol you intend to edit, choose Inherit, then select
the symbol whose preferences you wish to see reflected in the first. The new
settings will be displayed in the dialog. Choose Apply to perform the edit.
Using the Default Option

The Default option resets the preferences to the customer default settings.
You can use this option to set the preferences before creating a new symbol or
to edit an existing symbol.
To edit an existing symbol, select the symbol and choose Default. The default
settings will be displayed in the dialog. Choose Apply to update the symbol.
Associativity of Utility Symbols

A utility symbol’s placement is controlled by a position on an object. The
system will automatically size the symbol components to the objects selected
to create it, based upon the local preference settings.
Deleting Utility Symbols
You can delete a utility symbol by selecting the symbol from the
graphics window and choose the Delete icon. (Edit→Delete)
The symbols can be selected at any position. When you delete a utility
symbol, any associated objects such as dimensions are also deleted unless the
Retain Annotation option in Preferences→Drafting is turned on.
Adding Automatic Centerlines

Automatic center lines may be added to a view after its creation. The hole
or pin axis must be either perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the
drawing view
To apply automatic center lines:
• Choose Insert→Symbol→Utility Symbol.
• Choose Automatic Centerline.
• Select the view and choose Apply.
Creating a Linear Centerline
A linear centerline is a straight line that passes through selected points or

arcs, with a perpendicular line through each position. A linear centerline that
passes through a single point or arc is called a simple centerline.
To create a linear centerline, select the Linear Centerline icon, set the point
position option if needed, select relative objects, and select Apply or OK.
The following associativity rules apply to linear centerlines:
• If the linear centerline contains two associated points, repositioning or
deleting one of those points results in an automatic resize and update of
the linear centerline.
• If the linear centerline contains three or more associated points and a

point is removed from the centerline, that point is disassociated from
the centerline.
• If the linear centerline contains three or more associated points and all
the associated points are moved, the centerline is automatically resized
and updated. If all of the points are deleted, the centerline is also deleted,
depending on the Retained Annotation status.
Activity - Creating a Linear Centerline
In this activity, you will create a linear centerline.

Step 1: Open the pau_drf_sym1_dwg part.
Step 3: Verify the work layer is set to Layer 101.
Step 4: Create a simple centerline.
Choose Utility Symbol.

(Insert→Symbol→Utility Symbol)
Choose the Linear Centerline icon.
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.
Select the single hole at the right end of the bar.
If you select the wrong point for the symbol position,

choose the icon again to deselect the object and start
over.
Choose Apply to create the centerline (or MB2).
Step 5: Create a linear centerline.

A linear centerline is created if you select multiple collinear holes.
Select both of the outer circles of the counterbored holes.
The size of the symbol components is determined by the objects

selected. The linear centerline would display with a different size
if the inner circles had been selected.
Choose Apply (or MB2).
Any holes selected that are not collinear will not be added to
the symbol.
If a point is selected that is not collinear, the following error

message will appear.
Manually Creating a Cylindrical Centerline
You can create a cylindrical centerline that conforms to ANSI Y14.2 standards
through points, arcs or cylindrical faces. The objects used to create cylindrical
centerlines are defined by the Position Option.
1 — Control Point
2 — Intersection Point
3 — Arc Center
4 — Cylindrical Face
The Cylindrical Face position option allows you to choose a cylindrical or

conical face of a feature for placement.
Point position options allow you to create a centerline associated to objects
other than cylinders.
The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines:
• A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions.
• A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated

is moved or resized.
• If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is

deleted, the centerline will also be deleted.
Activity - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline
In this activity, you will create cylindrical centerlines using both the Arc
Center and Cylindrical Face options.
Step 1: Open the pau_drf_sym4_dwg part.
Step 3: Change the work layer to 101.
Step 4: Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol.
Choose the Utility Symbol icon.

(Insert→Symbol→Utility Symbol)
Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Set the Point Position option to Arc Center.
Select two positions for each of the three centerline placements

shown below:
1 — Select this pair of edges.

2 — Select this pair of edges.
3 — Select this pair of edges, confirming your selections if
needed.
The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown.
When creating cylindrical centerlines, you may not always be

able to use the Arc Center point position option. The larger
hole depicted in the section view is partially hidden. Since you
cannot see the left edge of the hole in this view, you would not be
able to select it.
In the orthographic view, you will find it impossible to select the
right hand edge of a small hole without picking the center of the
larger outside edge of the part instead.
In this case, the Cylindrical Face option can be used to select a
cylindrical or conical face of a feature for placement of a centerline
symbol.
Step 5: Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face option.

Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon.
Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.
Place your cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select
the face using MB1.
Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline,

using cursor locations as shown. The indicated end points are
projected to the axis of the cylindrical face, and two drafting
points are created that are associated to the selected face.
When creating centerlines using the Cylindrical

Face option, the local display parameter values
that determine the symbol past part distances are
disregarded.
Challenge: Using the parts from this lesson, create some of the other Utility
Symbols by choosing the appropriate icon and following the cue line.
Creating Dimensions
The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways.
• One way is by choosing Insert→Dimension and then selecting the desired
dimension type.
• The second method of creating dimensions is to use the Dimensions

toolbar. This toolbar offers a graphic representation of the available
dimension types.
The Dimensions toolbar contains an icon for each type of dimension,

including Ordinate, Chain, and Baseline Dimensions.
Annotation Preferences
Dimensions may be displayed in many different ways. Some of the settings

are for appearance, i.e. extension line and arrowhead. Other settings convey
the value of the dimension, i.e. the number of decimal places used to define
tolerance. In general most of the dimensions will share the same appearance.
The Annotation Preferences dialog is used to capture those global settings.
The Annotation Preferences dialog is activated by choosing
Preferences→Annotation or by choosing the Annotations Preferences icon.
The following tabs apply to dimensions:

• Dimensions — Controls the display of extension lines and arrows,
orientation of text, precision and tolerance, chamfer dimensions, and
narrow dimensions.
• Line/Arrow — Controls the style and size of leaders, arrows, and

extension lines for both dimensions and other annotations. A preview
area provides a rendition of the symbol with leaders and dimensions.
• Lettering — Controls the alignment, justification, size, and font of text.
• Units — Controls the desired unit of measure for dimensions and whether
dimensions are created in single or dual dimension format.
• Radial — Controls the settings that are unique to diameter and radius
dimensions.
Dimension Creation
Once a dimension type is selected, a Dimension icon option bar will appear
This option bar accesses many of the same settings found in the Annotation
Preferences dialog that apply to dimensions. However, when changes are
made with this option bar, they only affect the dimensions being created in
the current operation and do not change the global preference settings. The
settings will return to the global condition when you exit dimension creation
or choose Reset (5).
1 – Style 2 – Precision (decimal places)

3 – Tolerance Type 4 – Annotation 5 – Reset
Annotation Placement Toolbar

The Annotation Placement toolbar also appears when creating dimensions
to help control the placement of the dimension.
1 – Leader type 2 – Leader direction 3 – Access Leader Tool

dialog
4 – Associate origin 5 – Alignment location 6 – Access Origin Tool
with help lines dialog
The Snap Point Toolbar

The Snap Point toolbar will be available when creating dimensions.
This toolbar acts as a filter for selecting points on parts. You can turn icons on
(highlighted) or off in order to limit your selection to specific types of points.
The Two Pick Intersection icon (at the right end of the toolbar) will let you
select any two edges whose intersection you cannot get within the select ball.
(When you turn it on, all of the other icons will be grayed out.)
The Escape Key

You can press the Escape key at any time to release all selected objects. It is
often quicker than using Shift+Select.
Placement Cues for Dimensions
As you create dimensions it is now very simple to align the dimension with an
existing dimension. To help you do this, the system will provide graphical
cues whenever the origins of the dimensions line up.
As you begin to locate the dimension, pass the cursor over the existing
dimension that you want to align to. Whenever the placement image of
the new dimension is aligned horizontally or vertically with the existing
dimension (or other annotation), you will get a dashed help line.
If you want the new dimension associated with the existing dimension, make
sure the Associate Origin with Helper Line icon is turned on (It is
on by default).
The help lines appear only when you are creating a new dimension.
If you move an existing dimension, the system will not display
the help lines.
Appended Text
Text may be appended to a dimension while you are creating it.

If you want only one line of appended text, you can select the object(s) to
dimension and, prior to locating the dimension, choose one of the Appended
Text options in the MB3 pop-up menu.
You may also use the right (after), left (before), up (above), or down
(below) arrow key on the keyboard instead of the MB3 pop-up
options.
If the text is more complex, you will need to use the Annotation Editor dialog.
You can access the Annotation Editor from the interactive toolbar at any
time, or you can access it after selection of objects (and before locating the
dimension) by using MB3.
To add appended text to a previously created dimension that does not already
have appended text, you can:
• Double-click on the dimension, and then use the Annotation Editor icon
in the interactive toolbar.
• Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the
appended text location you desire. Key in the text and press Enter.
• Double-click on the dimension, and then use MB3 to choose either

Appended Text (for a single line of text), or Annotation Editor (for more
complex text).
To edit existing appended text, you can:

• Double-click on the appended text.
• Double-click on the dimension and then use the right (after), left (before),
up (above), or down (below) arrow key on the keyboard to get the
appended text location you desire.
• Select the dimension, and then use MB3 on the appended text. You get
the following menu:
the Edit Appended Text option will access the Annotation Editor dialog.
Tolerances
There are several ways to add or edit tolerances.

Prior to creating a dimension (after choosing a dimension icon), you can
choose the Tolerance icon on the interactive toolbar, and set the desired
tolerance type. The Tolerance Values icon is then added to the toolbar. Choose
it and enter the desired values.
While creating a dimension (after selecting the object to dimension), you can:
• Set the tolerance type by choosing either MB3→Tolerance Type or the
Tolerance Type icon.
• Set the desired tolerance values by choosing either MB3→Tolerance or

the Tolerance Values icon.
Tolerance Type icon
Tolerance Values icon
To add a tolerance later, you can select the dimension and use the methods
shown above.
To edit a tolerance later, you can use one of the following three methods:
• Select the tolerance with MB3→Edit.
• Double-click on the tolerance.
• Double-click on the dimension to access the dimension bar (in the upper
left corner of the graphics screen).
Text Orientation and Text Arrow Placement
To set the Text Arrow Placement or the Text Orientation while creating a
dimension, use MB3 before locating the text. You get the following menu:
Horizontal
Aligned
Text Over Dim. Line
Perpendicular
Text at Angle
Automatic
Arrows Out
Arrows In
To change Text Orientation or Text Arrow Placement of an existing

dimension, double–click on the dimension, and then use MB3. You will get
the same menu as shown above.
Moving a Dimension
To change the origin of an existing dimension, simply drag it with MB1,
without any function active.
The cursor will change to when you are in the move mode.
Editing an Existing Dimension
There are two possible pop-up menus that can be displayed when working
with an existing dimension.
One pop-up menu appears when selecting a dimension (outside of dimension
creation) with MB3.
The other pop–up menu appears when you double-click with MB1 on an
existing dimension (while in or outside of the dimension function) and then
click MB3.
When you access this pop–up menu, the dimension bar also appears in the
upper left hand corner.
If you again double-click (with MB1) on the selected dimension, you will
access the Dimension Style dialog.
Changing the Precision of a Dimension

There are a few ways to change the precision of an existing dimension. After
double-clicking on the dimension:
• Choose MB3→Nominal Precision.
• Choose the precision from the icon option bar.
• Press the number on the keyboard.
Inheriting Preferences from an Existing Dimension

After a dimension has been created, to edit its preference setting to that of
another existing dimension:
• Double-click (with MB1) on the dimension that is to change.
• Click MB3 on the dimension and choose Inherit.
• Select the dimension that has the desired preference settings.
Deleting Dimensions
You can use the dimension pop-up menu to delete a dimension or you
can select the dimension(s) to delete, and use the Delete icon.
Activity - Creating Dimensions
In this activity, you will create several dimensions using various local settings
on the Dimensions dialog.
Step 1: Open the pau_drf_fitting_dwg part.
Step 3: Verify that the work layer is 101.
Step 4: Create a Horizontal dimension.
Choose Inferred Dimension from the Dimension

toolbar. (Insert→Dimension→Inferred)
Select near the end points of the solid edges.
If you select the wrong object, press the Escape key

on the keyboard to deselect, and select again.
Place the dimension by clicking MB1 at the desired location.

If you need to change the style of an existing
dimension, double-click it (to select it), then
double-click it again to display the Dimension Style
dialog.
Step 5: Create a Vertical dimension.

The dimension you are about to create is based upon the selection
of a linear centerline, not the arc centers. This allows the gap to
be displayed between the centerline symbol and the dimension
extension lines.
Select the centerline symbol.
Choose the Equal Bilateral Tolerance from the Dimension

bar in the upper left corner of the graphics window.
Use the Dimension bar again to set the Tolerance Precision

to one decimal place.
Choose Tolerance Values.
Key in .1 and press Enter.
Place the dimension.
Click MB2 to cancel vertical dimension creation.
The Tolerance Type, Precision, and Value can also be

changed using the MB3 pop-up menu after selecting
the object(s) to dimension.
Step 6: Create a Cylindrical dimension for the diameter of the boss.

This dimension requires that you append text in front of the
diameter symbol.
Choose the Cylindrical icon from the Dimensions

toolbar. (Insert→Dimension→Cylindrical)
Select the two edges of the boss (in any order).
Before placing the dimension, choose

MB3→Appended Text→Before.
In the dynamic input field, key in 2X and press the Enter key.
You also need to adjust the placement before you establish the
dimension. You can do this with the MB3 pop-up menu.
Choose MB3→Placement→Arrows In.
Place the dimension as shown.
Step 7: Align a dimension with an existing dimension.

Select the two edges as shown below.
Choose Reset. The appended text is not needed on this

dimension.
Pass the cursor over the dimension.
Locate the dimension so that the alignment line indicates that

it is aligned with the dimension above it.
Click MB2 to exit the dimension function.
Text Creation
The Annotation Editor is used to create notes, labels, and GD&T symbols.
You can access the Annotation Editor interface by:
• Choosing the Annotation Editor icon from the Drafting Annotation

toolbar.
• Choosing Insert→Annotation.
The Annotation icon option bar and the edit window will be displayed in the
graphics window. However, the small edit window can be enlarged and moved.
1 — Annotation Bar
2 — Edit Window
3 — Annotation Placement Toolbar
Creating Notes
The Annotation bar is stationary. It will always remain in the upper left
hand corner.
You can use it to:

1 — Access the full Annotation Editor dialog
2 — Change the Style for the annotation being created.
3 — Insert a special symbol.
4 — Insert a GD&T symbol.
5 — Insert a datum symbol.
The above options are also available while locating an annotation, by using
MB3 on the graphics window.
The Edit Window, found in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window
is also called the "Dynamic Mini-Text Box" because it lets you enter text and
symbols for your notes and labels. The Edit window contains some default
text (which is highlighted).
Because this is a window, you can drag any side or corner to change its size or
drag the entire window to a different location. Also, you’ll see horizontal and
vertical scroll bars appear whenever they are required.
The Annotation Placement toolbar works the same as it does for dimensions.
This window can also be moved to a different location, docked, or you can
close it if you will not be using it at the time.
Entering Text
To enter text, begin typing over the highlighted text in the Edit window.
You can use CTRL-i, CTRL-b, and CTRL-u to for italics, bold, and
underlined text as you compose the note.
It also appears on the cursor as a placement image.
After you locate the text, it remains in the edit window for you to use again or
edit for the next annotation.
You can also create a note on a drawing by dragging a .txt file from
an operating system window to the drawing.
Creating Leaders on Notes and Labels
To create a leader, do the following:

• Enter the desired text.
• Locate the cursor on the curve/edge/face where you want the arrowhead
located (with the cursor displayed as shown below).
• Press (and hold down) MB1 and drag the cursor away from the selection
point. A temporary display of the leader will be shown on the screen.
• Click MB1 at the location for the text.
If you want a second leader, repeat the steps 2 & 3 before defining a text
location with MB1.
If you want the leader to point to empty space instead of an object
use the same procedure. The only difference is that the cursor will
not display in a “ leader” mode if an object is not selected.
Activity - Creating Notes and Labels
In this activity, you will create several notes and a label.

Step 1: Open the pau_drf_fitting_dwg part.
Step 3: Verify your current work layer is set to 101.
Step 4: Create a note.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon.

(Insert→Annotation)
The Annotation Bar, Edit window, and Annotation Placement
Toolbar will be displayed.
Press Backspace to remove the text from the Edit window.
Enter your name into the Edit Window. It will be placed in

the title block.
There are no limits on the number of characters per line,

or the total number of characters that can be entered.
Step 5: Place the note on the drawing.

Zoom in on the Title block.
Drag the note to the desired location on the drawing,

and indicate the placement by clicking MB1.
Because you are currently using the system defaults for the
Lettering preferences, the text alignment position is located at
the mid-center of the note.
Notice that the text remains behind the cursor in the

graphics window. The text will continue to follow the
cursor until the Edit window is closed.
Step 6: Create a label.

In capital letters, key in the following text in the Edit window.
OMIT PAINT FOR
ELECTRICAL BONDING
Click and hold down MB1 on the phantom circle in the front
view and drag the text until you see a leader; release MB1.
Click MB1 once again to place the label as shown below.
Click MB2 to close the editor.
Step 7: Do not close the part, it will be used in the next activity.
The Annotation Editor

The Annotation Editor creates notes or labels consisting of text and drafting
symbols. You can include the following in a note or label:
• Drafting symbols
• Fractions and two-line text
• GD&T symbols
• User-Defined symbols
• Expression values
• Part and Object Attributes
You can access the Annotation Editor dialog by choosing the Annotation
Editor icon from the Drafting Annotation icon option bar.
The Annotation Editor dialog will be displayed.
1 — Toolbar
2 — Text Entry Window
3 — Preview Window (Show Preview icon must be selected)
4 — Symbol Display and Text Preference Options
As you enter text and symbols, the text and control characters appear within
the Text Entry Window. In this window you may use the formatting options
available on the Toolbar to customize the appearance of your text.
For example, you may want your name to appear as italic, underlined
letters. As you type, the text will appear in the graphics window and in the
annotation editor preview window (if toggled on) as shown.
Annotation Editor Tools

The Annotation Editor dialog contains several options for text formatting.
Some of the more common options are described below.
1 — Clears the display in the text entry and preview area.

2 — Opens (or closes) the preview area.
3 — Text font.
4 — Text scale factor.
5 — Options to add text attributes (bold, italicized, underlined, superscript,
subscript)
6 — Deletes text attributes.
Editing Notes
You can edit text in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the
drawing and using the MB3 pop-up menu.
You get the following menu:
You can also edit annotation objects by double-clicking (with MB1) on the
note or label. You can also use MB1 to select multiple objects (but this will
reduce the options available on the MB3 pop-up menu).
Helper Lines
Helper lines act as a guide that allows you to line up notes, labels, dimensions,
symbols, and views to other drawing objects on the drawing. Helper lines
appear as a dashed line.
To use helper lines, move the cursor over the object to
which you want to align as you are placing the new
annotation. The note highlights and helper lines appear.
Press and release MB1 to place the annotation at the desired location.
Activity - Creating More Notes
In this activity, you will continue creating notes and adding them to the
drawing.
Step 1: Continue using pau_drf_fitting_dwg.
Step 2: Create a note.
Choose the Annotation Editor icon.

(Insert→Annotation)
In capital letters key in the note shown below.

NOTE: 1) DIMENSIONS AND
TOLERANCING PER ASME Y14.5M-1994.
2) BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.
Place the text in the lower left corner of the drawing as shown
below by clicking MB1 at that location.
Step 3: Create another note using the Annotation Editor dialog.

Choose the Annotation Editor icon from the icon option bar
Choose the Clear icon in the dialog to clear any text in

the editor.
Verify the Font is set to blockfont and the change the

Character Scale Factor to 1.75.
In capital letters, enter the text for the drawing number

05-FIT-2475.
Locate the drawing number in the title block as shown below.
Step 4: Complete the title block.
Choose Clear on the Annotation Editor dialog.
Key in: 1/1
Place the text in the Scale area of the title block.
Key in 2DAY.
Pass the cursor over 1/1 so that a dashed alignment help line is
shown.
Place the text in the “Date” area of the title block.
Complete the Title Block by adding the sheet numbers.
Close the Editor and click MB2 to exit.
Step 5: Change the date on the drawing to today’s date.

Click MB3 on the date 2DAY in the title block.
Choose Edit Text from the pop-up menu.
Highlight 2DAY in the Edit Window and type in today’s date

(MM-DD-YY).
Click MB2 to close the Edit Window.
Step 6: Reposition the date.

Using MB1, drag the date so that the right end fits inside
the box.
Notice how it maintains alignment with the scale
note.
If required, drag the 1/1 note down so that the date does not
lay on top of the word “DATE”.
Master Model Drawing Guidelines

1. Create the ’drawing’ file (Open seedpart_mm or seedpart_in, FILE→SAVE
AS, xxxxxxx_dwg)
2. Start the Assemblies application (APPLICATION→ASSEMBLIES)
3. Add the part to be detailed as a component

(ASSEMBLIES→COMPONENTS→ADD EXISTING)
4. Change to the Drafting Application (APPLICATION→DRAFTING)
5. Adjust the sheet; name, units, size, projection angle (EDIT→SHEET)
6. Add the drawing formats; title block, border, revision block, standard
notes (Site dependent)
7. Set View Display Preferences; hidden line removal, section backgrounds,

threads (PREFERENCES→VIEW)
8. Add the first ’Imported’ view; typically top or front

(INSERT→VIEW→VIEW and select the Import View icon)
9. Add more views; orthographic, detail, auxiliary, section, isometric,

exploded (INSERT→VIEW→VIEW and select the Orthographic icon)
10. Adjust the view display; size, orientation, etc. (EDIT→STYLE or

EDIT→VIEW)
11. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits; erase object, edit
entire object, edit object segment (EDIT→VIEW→VIEW DEPENDENT)
12. Add the Utility Symbols; centerlines, target symbols, intersection symbols
(INSERT→UTILITY→SYMBOL)
13. 14. Add the dimensions (INSERT→DIMENSION)
14. Add the notes, labels, and GD&T’s (INSERT→ANNOTATION)
Summary
The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings. Views and
dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model
and update when changes are made to the model.
The Annotation Editor interface makes it easy to create, edit and delete notes
and labels. The annotation bar and edit window allows you to work with
notes and labels without opening the Annotation Editor dialog.
In this lesson you:
• Modified a drawing.
• Added views to a drawing.
• Created Utility Symbols.
• Created Dimensions.
• Added annotation to a drawing.
Lesson
12 Datum Plane Features
Purpose
This lesson will define datum plane features.
Objectives
• Create a Datum Plane using various methods.
• Understand uses of datum planes.
• Create a hole feature on a tangent datum plane.
• Move a hole feature location by changing a datum plane angle.
• Edit a datum plane.
Datum Plane Features
Datum Reference Features

Datum features are construction tools that assist in the creation of solid
features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement
faces do not exist or as associative linear objects. Datum Features are
theoretically infinite in size, but the display is limited to a size slightly larger
than that of the solid model. Datum Features may be created relative to an
existing solid model or fixed in model space. This lesson will only discuss
relative datum planes.
In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the
outside of the cylinder a construction tool is necessary. This tool is needed
because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather
than the cylindrical face of the base solid.
Datum Plane reference features are accessible by choosing

the Datum Plane icon on the Form Feature toolbar or by choosing
Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane from the menu bar.
Datum Plane Overview
The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that
has many uses.
• To define a sketch plane.
• To act as the planar placement face for the creation of form features (i.e.:
hole, slot, pad, boss, pocket, etc.).
• As a target edge for positioning features.
• As a horizontal or vertical reference.
• For the mirror plane in Mirror Body and Mirror Feature.
• To act as the “trim to” face (extruded and revolved bodies).
• To trim a body.
• In assemblies, as mating TO or FROM object(s).
• To help define a relative Datum Axis.
Relative Datum Planes

Relative datum planes are constrained (associated) to other geometric objects.
A constraint is a restriction on a datum that positions it relative to some
existing control point, edge, axis, plane, or face.
Many constraint combinations can be used to create relative datum planes.
Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection

When you create a relative datum, you create it by selecting other objects
in the model. You can select curves, faces, edges, points, and other datums
for the reference objects. By default, the constraint type is inferred based on
the objects you select, and the sequence in which you select them. You can
also specify a constraint explicitly, and then select the object to be associated
with it.
Datum Plane User Interface

There are two basic methods you can use to construct datum planes:
• Choose the Datum Plane option and then select the required objects
for the datum from the graphics window.
When you have selected enough valid objects to define a datum, a preview
of the datum is displayed in the graphics window. Use the Datum Plane
icon options to help specify objects and constraints.
• Select the edges, planar faces or wireframe geometry needed to specify

the datum first and then choose the Datum Plane option.
The system attempts to infer the best mode to use with the selected
objects to successfully define a datum and presents a preview of the
datum in the graphics window. If a datum plane cannot be created based
on the selected objects, use the Datum Plane icon options to change the
mode, add additional objects, or change the constraints.
Before creating the datum based on the preview, you can specify new
constraints and objects and change the parameters of the previewed datum
by dragging the handles displayed in the graphics window. Advanced editing
options to change the type of the datum and delete or change constraints
are available with the full dialog.
Datum Plane Icon Options
Opening Datum Planes first displays the icon options in the upper left corner
of the graphics window (unless there are no objects in your part, where you
will get the Datum Plane dialog instead). The icon options use the Inferred
method to let you quickly create a datum plane based on your object and
optional constraint selections.
The Datum Plane icon options include the following tools:
Icon Use
Datum Plane Dialog - Use the dialog to create datum
planes that are more specific than those you can create
with the Inferred method.
Constraints Cascade Menu - Available constraints are

Inferred, Coincident, Parallel, Perpendicular, Center,
Tangent, Offset and Angle.
Only constraints appropriate for the currently selected
objects appear on the menu. If no objects are selected, all
constraints are available. If you specify a constraint, the
objects you can select are somewhat limited to what is
appropriate for that constraint. If the objects you select
could not be used to create a datum with the specified
constraint, the system resets the constraint to Inferred,
and the selectable objects change.
Alternate Solution - Cycles through different solutions
when more than one type of datum plane can be created,
based on the object selections and constraints.
OK - Creates the previewed datum plane and dismisses
the Datum Plane option.
Cancel - Discards all datum plane constraints and exits

the Datum Plane option.
If you choose MB2 while pressing the Ctrl key (or MB3→Apply)
instead of OK to create the previewed datum plane, the datum
plane icon option bar will remain in the graphics window. This will
save time if you are creating multiple datum planes.
Datum Plane Types

The following is a list of the datum plane creation methods that will be
covered in this lesson:
• Offset
• Center
• Through Cylindrical Axis
• At an Angle to Face or Datum
• Tangent to a Cylindrical Face
• Through Three Points
• Point on a Curve
• Point and Direction
Offset
This method constrains the datum so it is at a specified distance from planar

geometries.
• Choose the Datum Plane icon.

(Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Plane)
• Select a planar face. A preview of the datum plane displays, with an

offset handle.
• Do one of the following:
– Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero).
– Key in a value, press Enter, and choose OK.
– Select the handle at the base of the normal, drag the datum plane to
the desired location and choose OK.
Center
This method lets you create a datum plane that is centered between planar
geometries.

• Select a planar face. A preview of an offset datum plane displays.
• Highlight a second planar face.

Selecting the second face causes a datum plane using the Center
constraint to be previewed.
• Choose OK.
Through Cylindrical Axis
This method creates a datum plane through a cylindrical axis:

• Select the cylindrical face or cylindrical axis symbol from the graphics
window.
• Choose OK.
At an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane and Through an Edge or Axis
This method creates a datum plane at an angle through a linear edge or

cylindrical axis.

• Select the edge through which the datum plane is to pass. You may choose
the axis of a cylinder instead of an edge.
• Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.
• Do one of the following:

– Key in a value for the angle (in degrees), press Enter, and choose
OK.
– Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the
desired angle and choose OK.
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and Through a Point
This method lets you create a datum plane that is tangent to a cylindrical face.

• Select the cylindrical face or cylindrical axis symbol.
• Turn on the Point on Curve option in the Snap Point toolbar.
• Select an edge of the cylinder.
• Drag the point to the desired location or enter a U Parameter value

between 0 and 1.
• Optional — Choose Alternate Solution to cycle between the tangent and
coincident solutions.
• Choose OK.
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and Parallel or Perpendicular to a Face/Plane
To create a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face and parallel or

perpendicular to an existing face/plane.
• Establish a planar reference. This could be an existing face/plane or a
new datum plane could be created as follows:
– Choose the Datum Plane icon.
– Select the cylindrical axis symbol.
– Choose OK.
• Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis).
• Select the previously created datum plane.
• Choose Alternate Solution until the correct tangent datum plane

is previewed.
• Choose OK.
Through Three Points
This method lets you create a datum plane by defining three points through
which the plane passes.

• Set the Snap Point toolbar as desired.
• Select three points. A preview of the datum plane is displayed.
• Choose OK.
If it is difficult to select points in the inferred mode, you can use

the Three Points option in the full Datum Plane dialog to prevent
the selection of other inferred object types.
Through a Point on a Curve
This method lets you create a datum plane tangent to, normal, or binormal
to a point on a curve.

• Open the full Datum Plane dialog by clicking its icon from the icon
option bar.
• Choose the Point on Curve option.
• Select a point on a curve or edge. A preview of the datum plane is

displayed, with the point on curve marked with a handle.
You can alter the datum plane by dragging the handle of the point to
change its position along the curve or entering an Arclength value.
• Use the Alternate Solution option to get other possible datum planes
(tangent, normal, binormal) at the selected point.
• If, in addition to the curve, you select another face or linear edge, the
direction of the datum plane is defined based on this second object as
follows:
– for a planar face or linear edge, the datum plane is made parallel
to the object.
– for a non-planar face, the datum plane is made parallel to the tangent
plane at the closest point on the surface.
• Click OK or Apply to create the datum plane.
Through a Point and at a Specified Direction
This method lets you create a datum plane by defining a point and a vector
direction.

• Choose the Datum Plane Dialog icon from the icon options bar.
• Choose the Point and Direction option.
• Select a point.
• Use the Vector option menu to define a direction, or accept the default. A
preview of the datum plane is displayed.
• Click OK or Apply to create the datum plane.
In the example below, a point was defined at the arc center of the hole and a
direction was defined using the Vector Constructor dialog.
Activity - Creating Relative Datum Planes
In this activity, three relative datum planes will be created. The datum
planes created are shown below.
Step 1: Open the pau_ref_1 part.
Step 3: Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above the

upper face of the block.
Choose Datum Plane.

Select the top face of the block (1) and confirm the selection if
necessary.
The top face highlights and a direction vector points normal

to the face, in this case, the positive ZC direction. The vector
displays the positive offset direction.
Key in 1 and press Enter.
Choose OK. (or MB2)
Datum planes have infinite bounds even though they are

displayed with visible boundaries.
Step 4: Create a second datum plane through three points.

The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the
block.
Choose Datum Plane.

Notice that the Snap Point toolbar is active and certain point
types are defaulted ON.
Verify that Point on Curve is turned off in the Snap

Point toolbar.
Select the first point (1) and confirm any of the edges. Any of
the edges are acceptable because they share the end point.
Carefully select each of the two midpoints (2 & 3).
Choose OK. (or MB2)

The datum plane is created and positioned through the three
selected points. The relationship of this datum plane through
the points will remain if the block parameters are changed.
Step 5: Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right
faces.
Choose Datum Plane.

Select the right planar face (1).
Select the left planar face (2).
Choose OK. (or MB2)

The datum plane is created and located at the center of the
part and is parallel to the faces selected.
Step 6: Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the datum
planes to the block.
With the cursor over the block in the graphics window, press
MB3 and choose Edit Parameters.
X Length = 2
Y Length = 2
Z Length = 5
Choose OK.
The revised values are displayed in the graphics window.
Again a dialog displays options to edit the feature. The feature
may still be modified without updating the model.
Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog to complete the

change.
Fit the view.

Notice that the constraints applied to the datum planes at
the time of creation continue to control the positioning of the
datum planes after the block is edited.
Selecting and Using Datums

When selecting a datum plane in the graphics window, one of its displayed
boundaries must be selected.
Form features created using datum planes as the planar placement face are
created normal to the datum plane. These features are initially located in the
center of the datum plane by default and will remain there if no positioning
dimensions are specified. If positioning dimensions are specified, the feature
will be moved to the constrained position.
When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face, a direction
vector is displayed showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature
will be created. An option is available to reverse the direction when creating
the feature.
Editing Datum Planes

To edit relative datum planes, use any of the following methods:
• With the cursor over the datum plane, click MB3 and choose Edit
Parameters.
• Double-click on a datum plane.
• Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon in the Edit Feature toolbar.
• Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters and select the datum plane.
Deleting Datum Planes

Use any of the following methods to delete a datum plane.
• Choose Edit→Delete
• With the cursor over the datum plane, click MB3 and choose Delete from
the pop-up menu.
• Select the datum plane from the graphics window and either press the
Delete key on your keyboard or choose the Delete icon.
Positioning Features to a Datums

When positioning a feature or sketch to a datum plane or axis, you cannot use
positioning dimensions that constrain a point to a point, such as a Horizontal,
Vertical, and Parallel dimensions. You can only use dimensions that constrain
a point to a line, such as a Perpendicular dimension, or a line to a line, such
as a Parallel at a Distance dimension.
If a datum plane is selected, the system projects the datum plane until it
intersects with the planar placement face of the target solid. The intersection
between the datum plane and the target face forms a line, which is used
to constrain the feature or sketch.
The method used to position features should be dictated by the
design intent. Construction of datum features can aid in the
application of positioning dimensions by making design intent
easier to achieve.
Activity - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes
This activity will demonstrate the creation of relative datum planes as they
apply to a cylindrical face.
Step 1: Open the pau_ref_2 part and save it as ***_ref_2 where ***
represents your initials.
A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of

the part, centered in the feature. Relative reference features are
required to accomplish this task.
Step 3: Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis, at an angle to the
existing plane of 90 degrees.
Choose Datum Plane.

Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature
at the bottom of the part and select the cylindrical axis symbol.
Select the existing Datum Plane.
Press and hold the Ctrl key and choose MB2 to accept
the default value of 90 and create the datum plane. (or
MB3→Apply)
Notice the datum plane icon option bar remains in the upper
left corner of the graphics window so that you can create
addition datum planes.
Step 4: Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same cylindrical
face to use as a placement face for the hole feature.
Select the original Datum Plane.
Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the

part.
Choose Alternate Solution until the new tangent

datum plane is in the orientation shown below.
Press and hold the Ctrl key and choose MB2 to create the
datum plane. (or MB3→Apply)
Step 5: Create a center datum plane.
Select the two faces shaded below.
Choose MB2 to create the datum.
Step 6: Create a hole.
Choose Hole. (Insert→Design Feature→Hole)
Choose Simple.
Specify a diameter of 10.
Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face (1).
Ensure that the tool solid for the hole is pointing into the part.
Choose the cylindrical face (2) of the hole through the center of
the bottom of the part as the thru face.
Choose OK.
Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered

on datum planes (3) and (4).
Step 7: Move the datum planes to another layer.

Choose Format→Move to Layer.
Select all the datum planes.
Choose OK.
Key in 62 and choose OK.

The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due to
its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained to
the solid body.
Activity - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane
In this activity, a relative datum plane will be created and used as a

placement plane for a hole at an angle to, and through a block.
Create a simple hole that will have its angle parametrically
controlled.

If the part was opened recently, you can choose
File→Recently Opened Parts and select the part from
a short list instead of searching for it in a directory.
The Recently Opened Parts list may contain up to ten
parts that have been opened in the current or previous
sessions.
Step 3: Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to a

face/plane.
Choose Datum Plane.

Select the right edge (1, not the mid point) and confirm the
selection if necessary.
Make sure Point on Curve is toggled off in the Snap
Point toolbar.
Select the top face (2), and confirm the selection if necessary.
In the Angle dynamic input field, key in 20 and press Enter.
Choose MB2 to create the datum plane.

A datum plane is created at a 20 degree angle from the top of
the block and passes through the selected edge.
Step 4: Create the hole perpendicular to the datum plane.
Now a Simple Thru Hole will be created using the datum plane.
The hole will be normal to the datum plane, but will pass through
the block at an angle because the datum plane is angled to the
block.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in .5 for the diameter.
Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for

the placement face.
Select the bottom face (1) of the block as the Thru Face.
Choose OK.
Features are initially located in the center of the datum plane.
If no other positioning dimensions are specified, the hole will
stay in this position. In this case, the hole will be positioned to
the front and right edge of the model.
The Perpendicular icon is already selected for the

first positioning dimension.
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.
Key in -.75 as the positional expression value.
Select the edge of the block shown (1), as the target edge.
Accept the value of 2.0 by choosing MB2.

The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location.
Step 5: Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.

Double-click on the datum plane.
Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees.
Choose MB2.
Try 80 and 90 degrees. Can you explain the results?
Activity - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner
In this activity, you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and
Direction option.
The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner
of a block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains
associativity.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_mm part and save it as

***_hole_corners, where *** represents your initials.
Step 3: Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1.
Step 4: Change the work layer to layer 61.
Step 5: Create a datum plane with the point and direction method.
Choose Datum Plane.

Choose Datum Plane Dialog from the toolbar.
Choose Point and Direction.
Select the end point (1) as shown to define a point on the

datum plane.
Change the Inferred Vector to Vector Constructor.
Set the Vector Method to Two Points.
Select the end points (1 & 2) shown below.
Choose MB2 twice.
Step 6: Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane, through

the block.
Fit the view.
Choose Simple for the hole type.
Key in a diameter value of 25.
Select the datum plane (1) as the placement face.
If the hole is not going into the block, choose Reverse Side.
Select the far side of the block as the thru face (2) and choose
OK.
Choose Point onto Point as the positioning dimension.
Select the end point (1) as shown.
Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible.
Step 7: Modify the size of the block.

With the cursor on the block, click MB3 and choose Edit
Parameters.
Click on p2=100.000.
Key in 400.
Choose MB2 twice.
Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.
(Optional) Constraints
Datum planes may be created with one, two or three constraints. The
Constraints list box on the Datum Plane dialog displays the constraints
defined by your current selections. As you make selections, the list of
constraints is updated, and those available may change.
The basic constraints used with datum planes are shown in the following
table.
Constraints
Inferred - Automatically defines a datum
using constraints based on the objects selected.
Inferred is the default.
Coincident - Constrains the datum plane to be
coincident to a point, linear geometry, a linear
edge, line, datum axis or the axis of a cylinder,
cone or torus.
Parallel - Constrains the datum plane to be
parallel to another planar geometry.
Perpendicular - Constrains the datum plane to

be perpendicular to another planar or linear
geometry.
Center - Constrains the datum plane so it is
centered between planar geometries.
Tangent - Constrains the datum plane so it is

tangent to a cylindrical, spherical, conical, or
toroidal face.
Offset - Constrains the datum plane so it is at a
specified distance from planar geometries.
Angle - Constrains the datum plane so it is at an

angle to planar geometries.
Summary
Datum planes are reference features that are used as construction tools
to assist in the creation of solid features and sketches in locations and
orientations where planar placement faces do not exist. Reference Features
are theoretically infinite in size, but the display is limited to a size slightly
larger than that of the solid model.
In this lesson you:
• Created associative datum planes.
• Created hole features that are dependent and associated to datum planes.
• Created an offset datum plane.
• Created a datum plane through three points.
• Created centered datum planes.
• Created an associative datum plane by defining a point and direction.
• Edited datum planes to see how associative features are affected.
Lesson
13 Datum Axis Features
Purpose
This lesson will define datum axis features.
Objectives
• Create a Datum Axis.
• Position a hole feature using a Datum Axis.
Datum Axis Features
Datum Axis Overview
This option allows a linear reference feature to be created and has

several uses.
• Axis of rotation for revolved features.
• Axis of rotation for circular arrays.
• To help define a relative datum plane.
• Directional reference.
• Target for feature positioning dimensions.
Datum Axis Features
User Interface
When you choose the Datum Axis option, an icon options bar displays in the
upper left corner of the graphics window. When this option bar is displayed,
the uses the Inferred method to let you quickly create a datum axis based on
your object and constraint selections.
The full Datum Axis dialog is used to create datum axes with different design
criteria than those you can create with the Inferred option. To open the
Datum Axis dialog, click its icon on the icon options bar.
Datum Axis Features
Datum Axis Types

The following relative datum axis methods that will be covered in this lesson:
• Through Two Points
• Through Edge
• Through Cylindrical, Conical or Revolved Face Axis
• Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
The important function of these Reference Features is that they are

associative to existing geometry.
Datum Axis Features
Through Two Points
To create a datum axis through two points, do the following:
• Choose the Datum Axis icon. (Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis)
• Select two different point locations.
• Choose OK.
Datum Axis Features
Through an Edge or Curve
To create a datum axis through an edge or curve, do the following:
• Select the edge or curve but not on a control point.
• Choose OK.
The Point on Curve icon in the Snap Point toolbar must be off in
order to create a datum axis through an edge or curve.
Datum Axis Features
Through a Cylindrical Face Axis
To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face, do the following:
• Select the cylindrical face or axis symbol.
• Choose OK.
Datum Axis Features
Through the Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes
To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces or datum planes:
• Select the faces or datum planes.
• Choose OK.
There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of

two faces/planes. This requires creation of an associative linear
reference feature (datum axis) at the desired intersection to serve
as the pivot position. A datum plane may then be created through
the axis using any other constraint that applies.
Datum Axis Features
Editing Datum Axes
To edit datum axes parameters, use any of the following methods:

• With the cursor over the selection, click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters.
• Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window.
• Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon.
• Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters.
Deleting Datum Axes

• Use Edit→Delete
• With the cursor over the datum axis, click MB3 and choose Delete.
• Choose the Delete icon.
Datum Axis Features
Activity - Constraining Locations using Datums
In this activity, a datum axis and datum planes will be added to constrain
the pivot location of a hole feature.
A 0.5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. The origin of the
hole will be on the top face and located from the right face. The hole
is to remain centered in the block along the YC axis. The angle of
the hole shall be editable in a plane parallel to the front face.

If the part was opened recently, you can choose
File→Recently Opened Parts and select the part from
a short list instead of searching for it in a directory.
Step 3: Create the Reference Features.

Change the work layer to 61.
Choose Datum Plane.

Datum Axis Features
Select the right face (1) on the block as shown.
Key in -2 for the Offset value and press Enter.
Choose Datum Plane.

Select the back face (2) of the block as shown and confirm.
Select the front face (3) of the block as shown and confirm.

A center datum plane is created.
Choose Datum Axis.

(Insert→Datum/Point→Datum Axis)
Datum Axis Features
Select the datum plane (1) as shown.
Select the top face (2) as shown.
Choose MB2 to create the datum axis.

A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the
block and the associative datum plane.
Choose Datum Plane.

Select the right face (1) of the block as shown.
Select the Datum Axis.
Key in an Angle value of –45 and press Enter.
Datum Axis Features
Choose MB3→Apply to create the datum plane.
Select the newly created datum plane.
Key in 1 for the Offset value and press Enter.
Choose MB2 to create the datum.
Datum Axis Features
Fit the view.
Step 4: Create a Thru Hole.
Choose Simple.
Enter .5 for the Diameter.
Datum Axis Features
Select the edge of the offset datum plane (1) as shown.

The tool solid for the hole appears in the display.
Select the bottom face of the block (2) as the Thru Face,
confirm and choose MB2.
Choose Point onto Line.
Select the datum axis as the target edge.

A positioning dimension appears in the graphics area with a
value of 0.
Choose Point onto Line.
Datum Axis Features
Select the center datum plane (1) as shown and choose MB2.
The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay
centered in the block.
Datum Axis Features
Step 5: Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane.

Double-click on the angled datum plane (1).
Change the angle from –45 degrees to –20 degrees.
Choose OK.
The angle of the hole changes, but the point of entry remains
the same.
Step 6: Change the Location of the Datum Axis.
Datum Axis Features
Double-click on the offset datum plane as shown.
Datum Axis Features
Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK.
Datum Axis Features
Summary
A Datum Axis is a linear reference feature that is used as an aid in the
construction of other features.
In this lesson you:
• Created a Datum Axis.
• Positioned features using a Datum Axis.
Lesson
14 Sketching
Purpose
This lesson introduces the method of creating a sketch and free hand
sketching of curves.
Objectives
• Create a sketch.
• Create sketch curves.
• Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.
• Apply geometric constraints to sketches.
• Identify constraints.
• Convert a sketch curve to reference.
Sketching
Sketching Overview
What is a sketch?
A sketch is a feature that is intended to contain a collection of two dimensional

curves. Using a set of user-specified rules, a sketch parametrically controls
the two dimensional profile. These rules, called constraints, constitute
the essence of constraint based modeling, a very powerful portion of NX
solid modeling.
Profiles may be used to produce extruded or revolved features, or to define
sections for free form features such as a swept feature or a through curves
lofted surface.
A profile may contain some, all, or none of the constraints required to fully
capture the design intent. Dimensional and geometric constraints may be
used to establish a design intent as well as provide the ability to perform
parameter driven changes.
Geometric relations may be established between the curves within a profile
as well as with curves in other profiles and model geometry such as edges
or datums.
Sketching
Why sketch?
Sketched profiles provide a higher level of control over features and automate
the propagation of changes. The most obvious reason for sketching is to
quickly apply constraints to capture a well-known design intent. Another
reason is to iterate through a number of various solutions to validate a
certain design intent.
Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane, it will automatically move
when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Since sketches do
not require constraints, this approach is the quickest way to build features
and still have a sufficient level of associativity.
The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that, as rules are
applied, the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the
assigned rule has on the geometry. This gives you the ability to quickly
change profiles of features created using sketch curves.
When should a sketch be used?
You should sketch whenever you have a need for parametrically controlled
curves.
Many solid models can be created using combinations of form features. The
NX sketcher gives you the ability to sketch shapes that are not available as
standard form features. This could be accomplished with explicit curves, but
there would be no parametric control over the shape.
You should consider sketching when a combination of features used to create
the desired shape makes the shape difficult to edit.
Sketching
When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size, a sketch can easily
accommodate the iterations of the design by editing a single constraint.
Sketches may be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself
to extruded or revolved geometry.
Sketching
Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. Consider them for guide
paths for swept features, or as section curves for free form features.
The added advantage of being able to quickly and easily change the geometry
based on rules that the designer applies should be a large part of the
determination of when to sketch.
An important aspect of modeling that will help you decide when to use a
sketch is defining the design intent of the model. The design intent consists
of two items:
• Design Considerations - The geometric requirements on the actual
part, including engineering and design rules that determine the detail
configuration of the part.
• Potential Areas for Change - Known design changes or iterations, and

their effects on the part configuration.
As a general rule, the more design considerations and potential areas for
change, the more likely there are benefits from sketching.
Sketching
Sketches and the Part Navigator
Since sketches are features of the solid model, they are listed in the Part
Navigator. Editing options that apply to sketches are available in the MB3
pop-up menu.
Sketching
Sketches and Layers
Organizing the data in a part is an important aspect of modeling. The

sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating layer control as sketches are
activated and deactivated. This automated layer management is designed
to ensure that you do not accidentally construct objects in the active sketch
across multiple layers.
The current work layer is assigned to the sketch as it is created. When you
subsequently activate the sketch, the work layer is set to the layer assigned
to the sketch.
Sketching
Creating a New Sketch
Choosing the Sketch icon starts the sketch function.
The Sketch Plane

The first thing that needs to be defined is the plane that the sketch curves
will be placed on. But before this can be done you must consider the state of
the model. Since our goal is to develop a parametric model, all of the features
need to be associative. Is the sketch going to define the base feature or has a
base feature already been created?
The toolbar shown below is used to define the sketch plane.
1 – Sketch Plane 5 – Datum Plane

2 – XC–YC Plane 6 – Datum CSYS
3 – YC–ZC Plane 7 – OK
4 – XC–ZC Plane 8 – Cancel
Sketch to Define the Base Feature

If the sketch is going to define the base feature then you may define the plane
of the sketch by choosing one of the following:
• XC-YC Plane
• ZC-YC Plane
• ZC-XC Plane
• Datum CSYS
After the plane is chosen the plane is highlighted in the graphics window. You
then choose OK to accept and enter the sketcher function. The sketch
plane is then oriented normal to the graphics window.
Sketching
Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature

If a base feature already exists, then you will define the sketch plane on a
planar face or a datum plane of the base feature. The datum plane may
already exist or may be created on the fly.
If you are choosing a face or an existing datum plane:
• Select the face or datum plane.
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference.
• Choose OK.
If you are defining a datum plane on the fly:
• Select the required objects to define the datum plane.
• Choose OK.
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference.
• Choose OK.
Sketching
Defining the Reference Direction

The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the
sketch plane. When there is no linear object pointing in the desired horizontal
direction, a vertical reference may be defined. Because vertical is 90 degrees
(counterclockwise) from horizontal by definition, the horizontal direction is
interpreted from it.
In the example below, the shaded face (1) is specified as the placement
face. An edge (2) is defined as the vertical reference. The resultant sketch
orientation is shown to the right.
The direction of an axis may be changed as follows:

• To flip the direction of a sketch axis, double-click on it.
• To specify a new direction, select the axis to redirect and then select a
straight edge. The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define
the new direction.
If a datum plane is selected to define the sketch plane, a Z axis will

also be displayed. The normal of the sketch plane may be changed
by double-clicking on the Z sketch axis.
Sketching
Naming a Sketch
Since a unique name is required for each sketch, a default name will
initially be assigned with a numeric suffix. The format of the default name
is "SKETCH_###" where ### is replaced by the next sequential three digit
number beginning with 000 (SKETCH_000, SKETCH_001, etc.). A sketch
name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking
on the default sketch name, typing in the new name and pressing Enter.
The sketch can also be renamed by:

• Choosing Task→Sketch Properties
• Using the Part Navigator
It is recommended that sketches be given descriptive names rather

than accepting the default. This allows downstream users to
understand the function of the sketch at a glance.
Sketching
The Active Sketch
In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features

at different orientations. When using the sketcher, only one sketch may
be worked on at a time. This sketch is called the active sketch. Curves
created while a sketch is active become associated with the active sketch.
When returning to a sketch to add to or modify a profile, the sketch must be
activated. There are a few ways to activate a sketch:
• Double-clicking on a sketch curve.
• In the Part Navigator double-click on the sketch feature node.
• Select the Sketch icon and from the Sketch Name pull-down, select the
desired sketch.
There are also a few ways to deactivate an active sketch:
• Choose the Finish icon.
• Choose Task→Finish Sketch.
• Activate a different sketch.
• Choose Task→New and create a new sketch
Sketching
Sketch Creation Steps
Sketch for a Base Feature

• Set the work layer for the sketch.
• Choose the Sketch icon.
• Define the sketch plane by one of the following:

– XC-YC Plane
– ZC-YC Plane
– ZC-XC Plane
– Datum CSYS
• Name the sketch.
• Choose OK.
Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane
• Set the work layer for the sketch.
• Choose the Sketch icon.
• Select the face or datum plane. (The Sketch Plane option is the
default in the icon options bar)
• Define the horizontal or vertical reference
• Name the sketch.
• Choose OK.
Sketching
Activity - Sketch Creation

In this activity, you will create a sketch as a base feature, on an existing face,
and on a datum plane that is created on the fly.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_in part.
Step 3: Create a sketch for a base feature.

Make layer 21 the work layer.
Choose Sketch. (Insert→Sketch)
Choose the YC-ZC Plane.
Click on the sketch name, key in base and press Enter.
Choose OK.
The sketch is created.

In addition, a fixed datum plane is created on the specified sketch
plane and two fixed datum axes are created along its major axes.
The specified sketch plane defines a Feature Coordinate System
(FCS) for the sketch such that the X axis is parallel to the
horizontal direction and the Y axis is vertical. The WCS is
automatically manipulated to the FCS orientation to facilitate the
creation of sketch geometry.
Step 4: Invoke saved sketcher toolbar settings.

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.
Choose Close.
Choose Finish. (Task→Finish Sketch)
Sketching
Step 6: Open pau_skt_creation.
Step 8: Create a sketch on an existing face.

The Sketch Plane icon is already selected.
Select the face (1) shown below.

The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X-Axis is
active (highlighted).
Select the horizontal reference (2) at the location shown below.
Click on the sketch name, key in skt1 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Step 9: Create a curve on the sketch plane.
Choose Circle. (Insert→Circle)
Sketching
Create a circle by selecting at location (1) and then location (2).
Choose Finish. (Task→Finish Sketch)
Step 10: Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane.
Select the expression Change_Me and change the formula to

3.5.
Choose OK.
Rotate the part and notice how the circle remains associative
to the face.
Step 11: Create a sketch on a datum plane.
Orient the view to Trimetric. (Home key)
Make layer 22 the work layer, layer 21 invisible, and layer 1

selectable.
Choose Datum Plane.
Sketching
Select the two shaded faces shown below.
Choose OK.
A center datum plane is created.
The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the X-Axis is

active (highlighted).
Sketching
Select the edge for the horizontal reference at the location

indicated below.
Click on the sketch name, key in skt2 and press Enter.
Choose OK.
Choose Finish.
Step 12: Activate existing sketches.

This step will demonstrate two ways to activate existing sketches.
Make layer 21 selectable.
Sketching
Make sure that the Select Features icon is on in the

Selection toolbar.
Double-click on the sketch curve (1) shown below.
Fit the view. (MB3→Fit)

Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphics window.
Choose Finish.
Choose Sketch.
Sketching
Choose SKT2 from the sketch name option menu.
Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphics window.
Choose Finish.
Sketching
Sketch Curve Creation
Sketch Curve Toolbar
Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve toolbar. As curves are
created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer
Constraint Settings.
1 – Profile
2 – Line
3 – Arc
4 – Circle
Infer Constraint Settings
You can control which constraints are automatically inferred during

curve creation using the Infer Constraints Settings dialog. This dialog is
accessed by choosing the Infer Constraint Settings icon from the Constraints
toolbar.
Horizontal
Vertical
Perpendicular
Parallel
Collinear
Midpoint
Tangent
Coincident
Point on Curve
Point on String
Concentric
Equal Length
Equal Radius
As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to
represent the constraint that will be applied, if any.
Sketching
Locking a Constraint
When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that
constraint by pressing MB2. For example, you are creating a line and the
parallel symbol appears, you press MB2. Now as you move the cursor, the
new line that is rubber banding is doing so parallel to the reference curve.
Snap Angle
The snap angle is a preference setting in the Sketch Preferences dialog that is
applied when curves are being created. It is used to "snap" a line to horizontal
or vertical. The default snap angle is set to 3 and is user definable between
0 and 20 . This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or
vertical from the first specified location, effectively creating a 6 tolerance
zone by default.
When creating lines outside of the sketcher, snap angle only applies
when using inferred cursor location.
Snap Point Toolbar

The Snap Point toolbar can be displayed when creating most of the curve types
in the sketcher so that you have more control over the selection of locations.
When the Snap Point toolbar is active, regardless of the point types turned
on, cursor location is always available.
Sketching
Alignment Lines While Creating Curves

In the process of creating a curve, if you are horizontally or vertically opposite
a control point, the system will display an alignment line. The example
below depicts an existing curve (1) with a new curve (2) being created as well
as the alignment curves (3).
Profile Tool
The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs without
having to specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. Profile
is accessed by choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve toolbar.
The icon options in the upper left corner of the graphics window allow you to
switch between creating lines (1) or arcs (2) and allow you to switch between
entering X-Y (3) locations or entering parameters (4).
Sketching
The default settings are:

• Line creation
• X-Y location
Once you have created the first curve (line or arc), the default will revert back
to Line. You can change this any time you wish.
You can also switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1.
The "circle-X" symbol (1) controls the direction in which the arc will be
created.
If the desired arc is in the wrong direction, re-cross the end of the line (with
the cursor), and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol.
Arc originating from

top quadrant

left quadrant

right quadrant

bottom quadrant
As you create curves with the profile tool, the string mode can be broken
by clicking MB2.
Sketching
Creating Lines
Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon on the Sketch

Curve toolbar.
Once in line creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics
window give you two options: Location (by cursor location or entering an X-Y
location), and entering parameters.
There are several ways to create a line:

• Locate the start, and then locate the end.
• Locate the start, and then enter the length and angle parameters.
• Locate the start, enter one parameter, and then locate the end.
• Enter the parameters and then locate the start.
Once you indicate a start location, the system will switch to the Parameters
mode. But you can still give an end location without changing back to XY.
Sketching
Creating Arcs
Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon on the Sketch Curve
toolbar.
Once in arc creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics window
give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the second is
for the XY-Location/Parameters choice.
There are two different arc creation options:
• Arc by 3 Points — There are several ways to create the arc

with this method:
– Locate the start, locate the end, and then locate a point on the arc.
– Locate the start, enter a radius value and press Enter, locate the end
point and then determine which of the 4 options you wish to create.
– The same as the previous, but enter the radius value after locating the
end point, but before the point on arc.
• Arc by Center and End Points — There are several ways to

create an arc with this method:
– Locate the center, locate the start point, and locate the end point. (The
start point location determines the radius.)
– Locate the center, locate the start point, enter a radius value and
press Enter, locate the end point.
– Locate the center, enter radius and sweep angle values and press
Enter, locate the start of the sweep, and locate the direction for the
sweep.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the Enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing
back to XY.
Sketching
Creating Circles
Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon on the Sketch

Curve toolbar.
Once in circle creation, the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics
window give you two sets of options. The first is creation method, and the
second is for the location/parameters choice.
There are two different circle creation options:
• Circle by Center and Radius — There are a few ways to create

a circle with this option:
– Locate the center, and then locate a point on the circumference of
the circle.
– Locate the center, enter a radius, and press Enter. The circle is
created. You are then in multiple circle creation mode - just indicate
another location for a circle center.
– Locate the center, drag the radius until you get the size you want.
Press Enter. The circle is created, and you are in multiple circle
creation mode. Indicate another center.
• Circle by 3 Points — There are two ways to create a circle with

this option:
– Locate three points on the circumference of the circle.
– Locate two points on the circumference of the circle, enter a radius

value and press Enter, then choose which of the two options you
want by cursor location.
Once you indicate a first location, the system will switch to the enter
Parameters mode. But you can still give a location without changing
back to XY.
Sketching
Activity - Using the Sketch Profile Tool

In this activity, you will use the Profile tool to create sketch geometry.
Step 1: Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_skt_profile_1 where
*** represents your initials.
Step 3: Change the Work Layer to 21.
Step 4: Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane.
Choose the Sketch icon. (Insert→Sketch)
Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 5: Set the Infer Constraint Settings.

You are going to set the Infer Constraints Settings so that only
the constraints that you may want to apply will be available
during curve creation.
Choose Infer Constraint Settings.

(Tools→Constraints→Infer Constraint Settings)
Set the dialog as shown below.
Sketching
Choose OK.
Step 6: Create a Profile.

In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using
the Profile tool.
Choose the Profile icon (Insert→Profile) and move the

cursor into the graphics window.
Select a start location with the cursor near the bottom left
corner of the graphics window (approximately XC=-4, YC=-2)
Move the cursor so that the rubber-banding line snaps to the

horizontal orientation and the horizontal symbol displays (1)
as shown below.
Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is

going to be applied to the line.
Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint.

Now notice that as you move the cursor around, the
rubber-banding line remains horizontal.
Key in 3 for the Length and press Enter.
Sketching
Notice that a dimensional constraint is created automatically.

This is because a Length value was explicitly entered and
the Dimensional Constraints option was toggled on in the
Infer Constraint Settings dialog.
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end
point of the last line and then release.
You are now in Arc creation mode.
Key in 1 for the Radius and press Enter.
Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.
Click MB1 in the graphics window to apply.
Sketching
Continue using the Profile tool to create the remaining curves

in the sketch as shown below. You do not have to key in exact
values but just create the approximate shape.
Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line.
Dimensions maybe added at a later time to constrain

the remaining curves to specific sizes.
Choose Finish.
Sketching
Optional Challenge
Practice sketching the following profiles:
Sketching
Creating Fillets
Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon on the Sketch

Curve toolbar.
Once in fillet creation, icon options appear in the upper left corner of the
graphics window. The Trim Inputs option (1) determines whether or not the
original curves are trimmed. The Delete Third Curve option (2) determines
whether the middle curve is deleted in a three-curve fillet.
You can create fillets between lines, arcs or conics. You can also create a fillet
between two parallel lines.
There are several methods for creating Fillets:
• Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection), and then
drag the size and quadrant.
• Select two curves individually, and drag the size and quadrant.
• Select one curve, enter a radius value, and select the second curve.
• Select two curves individually, enter a radius value, and the indicate the
desired quadrant.
• Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. The size of the
fillet is governed by where the curves are selected.
Sketching
Trimming and Extending Curves
Quick Trim
This option will trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch. The
system will preview the results in pre-selection color.
You can also trim multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select
method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to
trim away.
You can also select a specific curve to trim to, by using ctrl-select to select
the desired boundary curve.
You can also select more than one bounding curve using the ctrl-select method.
In the example below, both the arc on the left and the spline on the right
were control-selected as boundary curves. With the cursor on the top line,
(between the two boundary curves), the center section is previewed as the
portion to be removed.
When a curve is trimmed, appropriate constraints are automatically created.

In the previous example, two Point on Curve Constraints, and one Collinear
Sketching
constraint would be added. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to

the line, the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident.
If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent. . .
the tangency constraint will be retained.
Sketching
Quick Extend
This option will extend lines, arcs and conics to the closest curve in the
sketch. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color.
The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the
boundary curve.
You can extend multiple curves at one time, by using the "crayon" select
method. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want
to extend.
You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select
method.
As with Quick Trim, when you use Quick Extend, appropriate constraints
are automatically created.
Sketching
Activity - Creating Fillets

In this activity, you will create fillets in an existing sketch.
Step 1: Open the pau_skt_fillet_1 part.
Step 3: Activate the sketch.

Double-click with MB1 on any of the sketch curves.
If the sketch cannot be activated by double-clicking
the curves, verify that Select Features is enabled
in the Selection toolbar.
Step 4: Create a 4 mm radius fillet using lines L16 and L20 with a single
selection and trimming the lines.
Choose the Fillet icon. (Insert→Fillet)
Make sure Trim Inputs is on (highlighted background).
Key in 4 in the Radius field on the graphics window, and press

Enter.
Sketching
Select both lines at the same time, by selecting at their

intersection.
Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can
select which quadrant you want.
Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the

desired quadrant.
Step 5: Create a 4 mm fillet using lines L16 and L17 with a single
selection and do not trim the lines.
Turn off Trim Inputs. (background not highlighted)
Select the two lines at their intersection.
Sketching
Select in the upper right quadrant.
Step 6: Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18. Select by
dragging across the two lines.
The 4.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the
graphics window.
With MB1 held down, drag across the two lines as below: (This
is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted. The
curves crossed with the "crayon" are the curves selected.)
Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used.
Sketching
Step 7: Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the
"crayon", but his time do NOT use a radius value.
Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field.
Drag (with MB1), as shown below:
It used the selection location of the curves to determine the

radius.
Step 8: Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19, and drag the size and
quadrant.
Individually select the lines L18 and L19.
Drag the cursor around the screen.
Sketching
Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below.
Choose Finish.
Sketching
Activity - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend

In this activity, you will trim and extend existing sketch geometry.
Step 1: Open the pau_skt_quick_1 part.
Step 3: Trim curves with Quick Trim.

Double-click on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose Quick Trim. (Edit→Quick Trim)
Select the line where the arrow is pointing in the illustration

below.
Sketching
Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the 2 curves as
shown below.
Ctrl-Select the curves labeled 1 and 2 for boundaries. Select on

curves 3 and 4 to trim the center portion.
Step 4: Extending curves with Quick Extend.
Choose Quick Extend. (Edit→Quick Extend)
Sketching
Place the cursor on the arc at location 1 as labeled below.
The status line informs you that the system cannot extend the
curve. This is because there is no other curve that would
intersect with the arc.
Place the cursor on the arc at location 2 as labeled below.
This time notice how the system provides a preview of the

extension.
Select the arc at location 2 to create the extension.
Sketching
Step 5: Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick Extend until
the instructor is ready to continue.
Choose Finish.
Sketching
Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined
by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location
of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects.
The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points.
By controlling the locations of these sketch points the curve itself may be
controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points
associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.
Line Arc Circle Fillet
Spline Point Ellipse
Degree-of-Freedom Arrows (DOF)
Degree of freedom arrows display at sketch points to indicate that the

solver is unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch
plane. DOF arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or
constraints; they are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point
with arrowheads pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when
the sketch point has no constraints).
An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free
to move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow
pointing up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the
vertical direction, both up and down. Should there be DOF arrows at a given
point in both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.
These arrows provide visual feedback while you are constraining the sketch.
Undefined Defined in
in X and Y Undefined in Undefined in X and Y
Directions Y Direction X Direction Directions
(no display)
Sketching
The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location
of the sketch points.
• Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These
sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined.
• Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter
defined.
• Ellipse - An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also,
the parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for
future editing.
• Fillet - Fillets are a specialized case of arc; by definition a fillet is tangent

to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as
the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as
other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define
the endpoints.
• Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined.
• Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific

locations in space.
• Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located.
Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines
that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however,
since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no
way to locate their defining points using constraints.
Sketching
Dimensional Constraints
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent.
This is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will
react to changing input. These rules are called constraints.
As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the
sketch profile to update in the manner desired. NX sketches are not required
to be fully constrained. The entire set of these rules may be thought of as
a constraint set. The constraint set can be comprised of dimensional and
geometric constraints.
The Sketch Constraints Toolbar
Creating Sketch Dimensions
A dimension establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the length of a

line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two objects (such
as the distance between two sketch points).
Dimensions appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions,
changing the value of the sketch dimensions changes the shape and or size of
the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This changes the
feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.
Sketching
Dimensions may be applied by using the dimension pull-down from the

Sketch Constraints toolbar.
There are nine icons available in the dimension pull-down. The top icon is
the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that
are selected. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system
is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are
"filters" that, when selected, will only allow a specific dimension type to be
created. Because of this, certain types of geometry may not be selectable if
they do not coincide with the dimension type selected.
As dimensions are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and
arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the
dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking MB1.
During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all
of the geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select
geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for
the dimension type desired and reselect the geometry.
Sketching
As dimensions are being created, the system creates an expression. This

expression’s name (1) and value (2) are displayed in a text box on the graphics
window after the dimension has been placed. This places the value field in
overstrike mode so you may enter the desired dimensional value.
Sketch Dimension Dialog
The Sketch Dimensions Dialog icon accesses the Dimensions dialog.
You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some
of the preferences. A slider (1) is also provided below the value text and
may be used to change the value.
Sketching
Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance
of the dimension.
The Placement option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the
dimension will be displayed. Options are for automatic text placement (1)
where the appearance is controlled automatically, manual text placement (2)
with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the
arrows outside (3) the extension lines.
The Leader option menu is for defining whether the dimension’s leader is
attached to the left (1) or right (2) of the dimension text.
Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension
creation.
Text Height
The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry
field at the bottom of the dialog. This value may be changed any time the
Dimensions dialog is active.
The default value is .150 inches (4 mm in metric parts). There are no limits
to values for this field. Modifying this value changes all the dimensions
in the active sketch.
Dimension Types
Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types

listed below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location.
Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), curves, edges,
datum planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method.
Sketching
Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

between two points with respect to the X-axis of the sketch coordinate system.
Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines,
and arcs are selectable using this method.
Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

between two points with respect to the Y-axis of the sketch coordinate system.
Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines,
and arcs are selectable using this method.
Sketching
Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint

directly between two sketch points. The parallel dimension is the shortest
distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this
method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected. In the
example below, the 1.25 dimension is from the tangent point of each arc. The
.5 dimension is from the line endpoints.
Perpendicular - Used to filter the system to specify a distance

constraint measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the
normal distance. If the desired point is an endpoint of a line, this endpoint
must be selected as the second object.
Sketching
Angular - Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimension

between two linear objects. The angle is measured counterclockwise from
the ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection. Only linear objects
may be selected with this method.
Radius - Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for
an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method.
Diameter- Used to filter the system to specify a diameter size

constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with
this method.
Perimeter- The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective

lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. After selecting the desired curves
and choosing OK, a dimension is created and its name is prefixed with
Perimeter, i.e. Perimeter_p7=6.456. There is no graphical representation of
this constraint on the graphics window.
Sketching
Activity - Adding Dimensional Constraints
In this activity, you will capture the design intent for a part by adding rules
that will control how the part is to change. These rules allow the part to be
easily modified.
The included angle of the adjustment slot should change from 45 to
75 by dimensional constraints.
Step 1: Open pau_angle_adj_1.
Step 3: Add the required dimensions.

Double-click on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.
Choose the Inferred Dimensions icon.

(Insert→Dimensions→Inferred)
Choose the Sketch Dimensions Dialog icon.
In the Text Height text box, key in .06 and press Enter.
Choose Close.
Select the right end (1, over halfway, not endpoint) of the
lower angled line.
The system infers that you wish to create a horizontal, vertical,

or parallel dimension depending on the placement of the cursor
relative to the geometry. DO NOT PLACE THE DIMENSION!
Sketching
Select the right end (1, not endpoint) of the upper angled line.
The system now changes the ghosted dimension to an angular

dimension.
Select a cursor location to place the dimension.
Select the right end (1, not endpoint) of the line across the
bottom.
Select the right end (2, not endpoint) of the lower angled line.
Sketching
Select a cursor location to place the dimension.
Choose MB2 to exit dimension creation mode.
Step 4: Change the viewpoint.
Choose Orient View to Model. (View→Orient View to

Model)
Choose Finish.
There are times, such as geometry creation, when looking

directly at the plane of the sketch is beneficial. At other times
it is beneficial to change the view point to more accurately
understand the effects of changes on the geometry.
Sketching
Editing Dimensions
The editing of dimensions may be achieved as follows:
• To edit value or the name, simply double-click on the dimension and edit
the value or the name in the text box and press Enter.
• To edit the position, place cursor over a dimension, press and hold down
MB1, and simply drag the dimension’s location.
Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed
below:
• Name - Enter a new name in the text entry field.
• Value - Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider.
• Position - Click and hold MB1 on the dimension and drag to its new
position.
• Text placement method - Select a different option from the option menu.
• Leader side - Select a different option from the option menu.
• Text height - Enter a new text size in the text entry field.
The name and value of a dimension may also be edited by using

the Expressions dialog. As dimensions are edited, the constraints
are evaluated and the geometry is modified.
Delay Evaluation
Delay Evaluation prevents geometry changes as one or more

dimensions are modified. This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar
or by choosing Tools→Delay Evaluation.
Evaluate Sketch
Evaluate Sketch controls sketch evaluation when Delay Evaluation

is on. (Sketches are evaluated automatically when you exit from the
Constraints dialog.) This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or
by choosing Tools→Evaluate Sketch
Sketching
Update Model
Update Model forces the model to update without leaving the sketch
function. (The model is updated automatically when you exit from the sketch
environment.) This is available as an icon on the Sketcher toolbar or by
choosing Tools→Update Model.
Retain Dimensions
When a sketch is deactivated the dimensions are normally hidden.

Retain Dimensions is a toggle on the Sketch Preferences dialog to retain
dimension display after the sketch is deactivated.
Retain Dimensions applies only to the active sketch, thus to suit your needs
you may have a mixture of sketches with and without retained dimensions.
Use this setting when you need to display dimensions without an active
sketch, for example to reference expression names between sketches, when
creating features, or for plotting.
Sketching
Activity - Editing Sketch Dimensions
You will see that the two dimensional constraints alone are not sufficient to
control the angle bracket from the previous activity.
Step 3: Change the layer settings.

Make layer 1 Selectable.
Sketching
Step 4: Edit a dimension.
Double-click on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.

Model)
Double-click on the 45 dimension.
In the dynamic input field, key in 75 and press Enter.
Sketching
Step 5: Edit another dimension.

Double-click on the 15 dimension.
In the dynamic input field, key in 25 and press Enter.
Notice how the geometry updates.

Basic geometric assumptions that we make when we look at this
geometry are not specified to the system, i.e. the bottom line has
no horizontal constraint applied.
If the geometry had been created in the sketch rather than added to
the sketch some of these geometric assumptions would have been
added to the geometry as constraints during the creation process.
Sketching
Choose Undo twice. (MB3→Undo)
Choose Finish.
Close the part.
Sketching
Geometric Constraints
A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch
object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship
between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or
perpendicular, or that several arcs have the same radius).
Unlike dimensional constraints, geometric constraints have no editable
numeric values; a constant angle constraint, for instance, simply dictates that
the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied.
The Constraints icon activates the process of creating geometric

constraints. There is no dialog.
Constraints are created by selecting the geometry and then choosing the
desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics window.
Only icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be
displayed.
During the selection of geometry you may also press MB3 on top of a selected
object to choose a constraint from a pop-up window instead of the icons in
the upper left corner.
If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time, you can

control-select the objects. Then the icons for constraints will remain
on the screen after you choose the first constraint. You can use MB2
or the Escape key to cancel creation of constraints.
Sketching
Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon.
Fixed Constant Angle
Collinear Concentric
Horizontal Tangent
Vertical Equal Radius
Parallel Coincident
Perpendicular Point on Curve
Equal Length Midpoint
Constant Length Point on String
Slope of Curve Uniform Scale
Non–Uniform Scale
Displaying Constraint Symbols
Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active. Symbols for

Coincident, Point on Curve, Midpoint, Tangent, and Concentric are always
displayed. The other symbols are not displayed at all times.
The Show All Constraints icon will display the symbols for all the
constraints in the active sketch.
Sometimes, when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed
out), the symbols may not be displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them.
Sketching
The following is a definition of each of the available constraints:
Coincident - constrains two or more sketch points as having the

same location.
Collinear - constrains two or more linear objects as lying on or

passing through the same theoretical straight line.
Concentric - constrains two or more arcs as having the same center.
Constant Angle - constrains a line so as to remain in its current

orientation without input of an angular value.
Constant Length - constrains a line so as to remain at its current

length without input of a length value.
Equal Length - constrains two or more lines as being the same length.
Equal Radius - constrains two or more arcs as having the same

radius value.
Fixed - constrains unchangeable characteristics for geometry,

depending on the type of geometry selected, as follows:
• Arc or circle - constrains the size and the location of the centerpoint.
• Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center, or ellipse center -

constrains the centerpoint.
• Arc or elliptical arc endpoint - constrains the endpoint.
• Ellipse or elliptical arc - constrains the centerpoint and the size.
• Line - constrains the angle and length.
• Point - constrains the location.
• Spline - removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or
rigidly dragged).
• Spline knot point - constrains the knot point.
Sketching
Horizontal - constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS X-axis.
Midpoint - constrains the location of a sketch point to be equidistant

from both ends of the curve.
For the Midpoint constraint, select the curve anywhere other than
at its end points.
Parallel - constrains two or more linear objects as being parallel to

each other.
Perpendicular - constrains two linear objects as being perpendicular

to each other.
Point on Curve - constrains the location of a sketch point as lying

on the path or projection of a curve.
Point on String - constrains the location of a sketch point as lying on

an extracted string.
Slope of Curve - constrains a spline, selected at a defining point, and

another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point.
Scale, Non-Uniform - Thus constrained, a spline will scale in the

horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical
direction during modification.
Scale, Uniform - A spline will scale proportionally in both the

horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes.
A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal
spline point as the uses of the two different constraint types are
mutually exclusive.
Tangent - constrains two objects as being tangent to each other.
Vertical - constrains a line as being parallel to the FCS Y-axis.
Sketching
Show/Remove Constraints
Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of

constraints. The constraints may be listed by object(s) or all of the constraints
of the active sketch may be listed at once.
1 2 3 4 5
Determines Determines Determines Determines Actions that
which what type of if the filtered what can be taken
objects will constraints constraint category of on the listed
have their will be will be constraints constraints.
constraints listed. included or will be
listed. excluded. listed.
Sketching
Constraint Interrogation
One way to determine what constraints are present is to pass the selection
ball over a sketch object. If the object has a constraint associated with it, the
sketch object will be pre-highlighted as well as other sketch objects that share
the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch
objects. If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints
associated with it, pre-highlighting does not occur. The constraint types and
their markers are shown in the figure below.
Fixed Constant Angle

Collinear Concentric
Horizontal Tangent
Vertical Equal Radius
Parallel Coincident
Perpendicular Point on Curve
Equal Length Midpoint of Curve
Constant Length Point on String
Mirror Scale, Uniform
Slope of Curve Scale, Non-Uniform
Constraint Categories
There are two major categories of constraints, Explicit and Inferred.

Explicit constraints are constraints that you create by assignment using the
constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. Inferred constraints
are Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and created
during the curve creation process. You have the option to list only Explicit
constraints, only Inferred constraints, or both.
Constraint Listing
The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by

selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. They are:
Selected Object – Once an object is selected, the associated constraints,
depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the dialog. To
view constraints associated with a different sketch object, simply select the
new object.
Sketching
Selected Objects – Allows the selection of multiple objects; the associated

constraints, depending on the selected constraint category, are listed in the
dialog. Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting
the object.
All in Active Sketch – List all the constraints of the active sketch,
depending on the selected constraint category.
Listing Box
Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by
selecting the constraint to highlight it. When the constraint is highlighted in
the list box, the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted
in the graphics window. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons
allow easy navigation through the various constraints. The Up and Down
arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior.
Information
The Information button located on the Show/Remove Constraints dialog will
list all of the constraints in the active sketch to the information window.
This is useful should there be a need to make a hard copy of the constraints
or save them as a text file.
Removing Constraints
Constraints may be deleted by these methods:
• Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select
Remove Highlighted Constraint(s), or just double click them in the list.
• Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection toolbar), select the constraint
symbol on the graphics window, and then choose the Delete icon.
• Turn on Select Constraints, select the constraint symbol on the graphics

window, and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint.
Undo
Undo from the edit pull-down on the main menu, the icon on the standard
toolbar, the MB3 pop-up menu, or the accelerator keys. Undo takes the
user actions back one step at a time.
Dragging Geometry
Under constrained geometry can be dragged only when not in a constraint
creation mode. Simply hold down and drag MB1 while on the selected
curve(s) or point(s).
Sketching
Selection
When in the Sketcher Task Environment, the selection toolbar changes. It
has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher.
Select Sketch Objects allows selection of all objects in the sketch -

curves and dimensions.
Select Constraints allows selection of constraint symbols on the

graphics window.
Sketching
Constraint Conditions
When the Constraints dialog is active, the status line lists the constraint
condition for the active sketch. A sketch may be fully constrained, under
constrained, or over constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the
status line will indicate the number of constraints needed.
A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. Each
time a sketch is evaluated, the system attempts to solve the set of constraints
that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships
with each other.
Fully Constrained
In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile, it may
be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able
to completely define all sketch geometry.
It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a
sketch. The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint
set applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner.
Under Constrained
A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to
completely locate each sketch point. Degree-of-freedom arrows are displayed
at each point that can not be solved to identify the direction in which that
point remains free to move.
Over Constrained
A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is
supplied to the solver. For example, if an Equal Length constraint is applied
to two lines and then dimensions are added to each to constrain their length,
the sketch would be over constrained.
The system highlights in orange the geometry and dimensional constraints
that are causing the over constrained condition in order to prompt for the
over constrained situation to be corrected.
An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the
geometric configuration. The sketch remains in the last solved condition.
Dimensional constraints that are not related to the over constrained condition
are displayed in blue. Geometry that is not related to the over constrained
condition is displayed in green.
Sketching
Conflicting Constraints
Dimensional constraints and geometry that are in conflict in the current
configuration with the current constraint set are displayed in pink. This
indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not solvable with
the geometry in its current configuration. Constraints may need to be added
or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint set.
Sketching
Activity - Adding Constraints

In this activity you will add constraints to the angle adjustment bracket to
cause the expected update to occur when a dimension is modified.
Step 3: Add the required constraints.

Double-click on a sketch curve.

Model)
Choose Constraints. (Insert→Constraints)
Sketching
Select the line (1) at the bottom of the sketch.
In the upper left corner of the graphics window, choose the
Horizontal icon.
This constraint will keep the line from rotating around when
dimensions are modified.
There are six places where the curvature transitions need
to maintain tangency.
Sketching
Select the six tangent curve pairs near the six points shown
below, two adjacent curves at a time, and apply Tangent
constraints to each pair. Be careful to select on the correct
half of the arc.
Lastly, the two arcs at the top of the slot should remain
concentric.
Sketching
Select the two upper arcs (1) and apply a Concentric
constraint.
The slot should now be constrained such that the angle may be
adjusted while the configuration remains as intended.
Choose MB2 to toggle the Constraints icon off.
Step 4: Edit the dimensions.

Double-click on the 45 dimension and change it to 75 .
The sketch geometry changes in the expected manner.
Sketching
Step 5: Apply the change to the solid geometry.
Choose Update Model. (Tools→Update Model)
Choose Finish.
Sketching
Activity - Constraining a Profile
Constrain the pipe vise sketch to satisfy the stated design intent.
Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be

controlled:
• The outside envelope of the part.
• The included angle of the angled lines.
• The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally.
• The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is

controlled by the radius at the bottom of the slot.
Step 1: Open pau_pipevise_1.
Step 3: Activate the sketch.
Double-click on a sketch curve.
Step 4: View the system applied constraints.
Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon.

(Tools→Constraints→Show/Remove Constraints)
Choose the All In Active Sketch radio button in the List

Constraints For: area of the dialog.
Sketching
Verify the Show Constraints option is set to Explicit.

The system created constraints are now displayed in the list
box. The dialog should look similar to the graphic shown below.
Choose the first constraint in the list.

The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics
window. There should be one horizontal line highlighted in the
graphics window. Let the instructor know if this is not the case.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of

the list box to browse through the constraint list.
Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog.
Sketching
Step 5: View the degree of freedom arrows.
Choose the Constraints icon. (Insert→Constraints)
Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the

sketch points. Even though most of the objects in the sketch have
constraints associated with them, the sketch points are free to
move in all directions. This is because the system cannot locate
any of the points relative to model space.
Step 6: Constrain the location of a point.

Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line.
Select the vertical datum axis.
In the upper left corner of the graphics window, choose the
Point on Curve icon.
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the constraint. The point

at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in the
horizontal direction.
Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line.
Select the horizontal datum axis.
Choose the Point on Curve icon.
Sketching
The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. The

shared sketch point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now
constrained in both the horizontal and vertical directions. The
degree of freedom arrows go away and, due to the horizontal
and vertical constraints on the lines that share the sketch
point, one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines
has disappeared.
Step 7: Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61.

The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch.
You will now move them to ease selection of objects and clean
up the screen display.
Choose Edit→Object Display.
Choose the Class Selection icon in the upper left corner of
Choose Type.
Choose Datums and choose OK.
Choose Select All and OK.
Enter 61 in the dialog layer field and press Enter.
Step 8: Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design intent.
Verify that the Constraints option is still selected.
Sketching
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines
(1) at the top of the profile.
Choose Collinear and Equal Length.
Choose Deselect All. (Edit→Selection→Deselect All)
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot taking note on which
side you choose. Select the short vertical line on the same side
of the arc (but not on the end point).
Choose Tangent.
Repeat the process for the other side of the slot.
Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal
line and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the
arc center.
Choose Point on Curve.
Choose Midpoint.
Choose Deselect All. (Edit→Selection→Deselect All)
Sketching
Select the line (1), shown below, between the midpoint and
the arc center.
Choose Vertical.
Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling

portions of the design intent will allow the profile to be changed
by modifying the numerical values.
Choose Inferred Dimensions.

Select the bottom horizontal line. Drag the dimension to

position it and select with MB1 to place it.
Key in a value of 5 and press Enter.
Fit the view if necessary.
Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it.
Change the value to 3.75.
Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension.
Change its value to .5.
Fit the view if necessary.
Sketching
Select the lower end (1, not endpoint) of the left angled line.
Select the right end (2) of the top left horizontal line, avoiding
its control points. Place the angular dimension and change
its value to 45 .
Select the left end of the top right horizontal line, avoiding its
control points. Select the bottom end of the right angled line.
Place this angular dimension and change its value to the ’p’
number assigned to the other angular dimension.
Select the arc at the bottom of the slot. Place the radius
dimension and change its value to .25.
Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint and
place this vertical dimension. Change its value to 1.5 and
choose Enter.
Sketching
The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully
constrained. Remember that it is not necessarily required
to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner
desired.
Step 9: Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included angle
in the notch.
Click on the first angular dimensional constraint that was
created and change it from a 45 to 30 .
Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of

this edit. Should that have not been our intent, we would have
to constrain the sketch in a different manner.
Choose Finish.
Step 10: Choose File →Close→All Parts.
Sketching
Activity - Sketching and Constraining a Gasket

In this activity, you will create and constrain a gasket. To efficiently capture
the design intent, constraints and dimensions will be added progressively.
The center hole is the origin of the gasket. The three holes are
located on a horizontal axis. The lines on the outer boundary of the
profile are tangent to the arcs.
Step 1: Open the pau_seedpart_in part and save it as ***_gasket_1

where *** represents your initials.
Step 3: Create a sketch.

Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part will be compliant
with class standards.
Click on the sketch name; key in s21_profile and press Enter.
Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.
Step 4: Set the Infer Constraint Settings.

Sketching
Verify that the Dimensional Constraints option is toggled on.
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create the circle representing the center hole.
Click and drag to create a circle similar to the one shown below.
Enter a Diameter value of 2 and press Enter.
Select the arc center of the center circle and the horizontal
datum axis.
Select the arc center of the center circle again and the vertical
datum axis.
Sketching

Note that the degree of freedom markers at the center circle
are removed and the status line indicates that the sketch
is fully constrained.
Step 6: Create a circle to represent the outer boundary in the center of

the gasket.
Sketching
Click and drag to create a circle near the center of the existing
circle. Enter a Diameter value of 3 and press Enter.
Select the two circles.
Sketching
Choose Concentric.
Step 7: Create a circle representing the hole on the left side.
Click and drag to create a circle near on left side of the graphics
window. Enter a Diameter value of 0.5 and press Enter.
Select the arc center of the circle and the horizontal datum axis.
Choose Point on Curve .

Sketching
Create a horizontal dimension from the arc center of the left

circle to the vertical datum axis. Change the value of the
dimension to 2.625.
Step 8: Create a circle for the outer boundary on the left side.
Create another circle in the left side of the graphics window
with a diameter of 1.
Sketching
Select the two circles on the left side and choose Concentric.
Step 9: Create circles representing the hole and outer boundary on the
right side.
Sketching
Create two circles on the right side of the graphics window

representing the hole and the outer boundary of the gasket. Do
not explicitly enter a diameters since you will constrain them
to be equal to existing circles.
Select the two new circles on the right and choose Concentric.
Select the arc center of the circles on the right and the
horizontal datum axis and choose Point on Curve.
Select the smaller circle on the left and the smaller circle on
the right and choose Equal Radius.
Select the larger circle on the left and the larger circle on the
right and choose Equal Radius.
Sketching

Create a horizontal dimension from the arc center of the left

circles to the arc center of the right circles. Change the value of
the dimension to 5.25.
Step 10: Set the Infer Constraint Settings before creating the lines.

Disable all constraints except Point on Curve and
Tangent .
Choose OK.
Step 11: Create the tangent lines on the outer boundary of the gasket.
Choose Line. (Insert→Line)
Sketching
In Snap Point toolbar, disable all options except Point on
Curve.
Create the lines by selecting the circles representing the outer

boundary of the gaskets. Select the circles by placing the
cursor near the expected tangency.
You should see Point on Curve and Tangent constraint symbols

on each end of the lines as they are created.
When extruding the sketch to create a solid body, it is

possible to define the correct boundary of the gasket
without trimming the circles.
Step 12: Choose Finish.
Sketching
Convert To/From Reference
At times it may be useful to add a dimension to a sketch to see the

effect of a change numerically. However, adding a dimensional constraint
would cause the sketch to become over constrained. It also may be necessary
to add sketch curves to aid in the construction and constraining of a profile
but do not represent a portion of the swept feature.
To support these needs, NX allows Reference objects within sketches. These
reference objects may be curves or dimensional constraints that are converted
from an active status. The Convert To/From Reference icon is located in the
Sketch Constraints toolbar.
To change the status of the objects, set the radio button to the status desired,
select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. An option menu is provided to
filter for All (the default), Curve, or Dimension.
Reference curves are displayed in a phantom line font and are ignored during
sweep operations.
Reference dimensional constraints are displayed with only the value portion
of the expression, regardless of the preference setting. The value for this
reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed, but it does not
control the sketch geometry with which it is associated.
Reference curves and dimensions are displayed in a cyan color. This default
color can be changed in the Customer Defaults (File→Utilities→Customer
Defaults and then choose Sketcher→Colors)
Sketching
Activity - Constraint Conditions
In this activity, you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the
design intent. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch, but
its simplicity allows the concept of over constrained to be easily shown.
Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. The
shape of the sketch should remain rectangular.
Step 1: Open pau_seedpart_in.
Step 3: Create a sketch on Layer 21.

Change the work layer to 21.
Choose OK.
Step 4: Set the Infer Constraints Setting.
Choose Infer Constraints Settings.

Sketching
Set the dialog as shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create a rectangle.
Choose the Rectangle icon. (Insert→Rectangle)
Select a cursor location, then drag and select a second cursor

location to create the rectangle.
Step 6: Interrogate the constraints that currently exist on this sketch.
Choose Show/Remove Constraints.

(Tools→Constraints→Show/Remove Constraints)
Choose the radio button for All In Active Sketch.
Set the Show Constraints to Explicit.
Highlight the first constraint in the list and use the down
arrow button to browse through the constraints.
Choose Cancel.
Step 7: Apply constraints to locate the sketch on the sketch plane.
Sketching
Select an endpoint of the left vertical line and the vertical

datum axis.
Select an endpoint of the bottom horizontal line and the

horizontal datum axis.
Step 8: Move the reference features to the proper layer.

Choose Edit→Object Display.
Choose the Class Selection icon in the upper left corner of
Choose Type.
Choose Datums and choose OK.
Choose Select All and OK.
Enter 61 in the dialog layer field and press Enter.
Step 9: Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and width of

the part as per the design intent.
Sketching
Choose the Inferred Dimensions icon.

Select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimension.

Select the left hand vertical line and place the dimension.
As dimensional constraints are being created, the

degree-of-freedom arrows are eliminated. The sketch is fully
constrained using one vertical and one horizontal dimensional
constraint, along with the geometric constraints inferred when the
lines were constructed.
Design Change — Modify the sketch so that it can be

controlled by the angle and length of a diagonal line.
Step 10: Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to reference.
Choose the Line icon. (Insert→Line)
In Snap Point toolbar, disable all options except Control
Point.
Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint of
the rectangle to define the line.
Sketching
Choose Convert To/From Reference.

(Tools→Constraints→Convert To/From Reference)
Verify that Reference is toggled On.
Select the diagonal line and choose OK.
Step 11: Apply an angular dimensional constraint.

Select the right end (not the endpoint) of the lower horizontal
line and the right end (not the endpoint) of the diagonal line,
and indicate a location for the angular dimension. Change
the value to 35 .
The angle will be applied to the ends of the lines closest to the
cursor position in a counter clockwise manner.
The sketch is now over constrained. The sketch objects
associated with the over constrained condition change color.
In this case, all of the active sketch curves and dimensional
constraints are displayed in orange.
To correct the over constrained condition, one or more of the
offending constraints must by removed. Remember, the new
design intent is to drive the sketch with angular and diagonal
length dimensions.
Sketching
Step 12: Apply a parallel dimensional constraint.

Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension.
Change the value of the dimension to 6.5.
Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the
value is modified. The system leaves the geometry in its last
solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved.
Step 13: Convert sketch dimensions to reference.
Choose Convert To/From Reference.

(Tools→Constraints→Convert To/From Reference)
Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions, and choose OK.

The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. The
reference dimensions are shown to reflect the value only.
Reference dimensions do not apply rules to the geometry to
which they are attached. The over constrained condition
would also have been resolved by deleting the horizontal and
vertical dimensions.
Choose Finish.
Step 14: Close all parts.
Sketching
Summary
This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation.
Sketches may be used to define a base feature, guide paths, and additional
associative features to the base feature.
A sketch parametrically controls curves. It can also be defined on a sketch
plane which is associative to a datum plane/face of a model. Both of these
benefits allow you to capture and maintain design intent.
Constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design
intent. The level of constraint, partial or full, is determined by the design
intent and what is necessary to capture it.
In this lesson you:
• Created a sketch on a fixed datum plane.
• Created a sketch on an existing solid face.
• Freehand sketched curves in a sketch.
• Constrained Sketches.
• Created Dimensional Constraints.
• Edited Dimensional Constraints.
• Created Geometric Constraints.
• Created Inferred Geometric Constraints.
Lesson
15 Swept Features and Boolean

Operations
Purpose
This lesson introduces Swept Features and Boolean Operations.
Objectives
• Create an extruded feature.
• Create an extruded feature with offsets.
• Create a revolved feature.
• Create a feature by sweeping a profile along a guide string.
Swept Features and Boolean Operations
Types of Swept Features

Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string (1). The section string may be composed of explicit curves, sketch
curves, solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
An Extruded feature (2) is one that is swept in a linear direction for a
specified distance.
A Revolved feature (3) is produced by rotating a section string (2) around

a specified axis (1).
A Sweep Along Guide feature (3) is produced by sweeping a section string

(1) along a guide string (2).
The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section
string and the guide string.
Extrude
The Extrude option (Insert→Design Feature→Extrude) allows a

feature to be created by sweeping planar, section string geometry in a linear
direction for a specified distance.
Extruding a Sketch
A sketch can easily be extruded using an object/action approach by placing
the cursor over it in the graphics window and choosing the Extrude option in
the MB3 pop-up menu. To select the sketch, the cursor selection must be set
to Select Features or Select General Objects in the Selection toolbar.
The Start and End extrude distances can then be specified by using the drag
handles or by entering a value in a dynamic input box. The Start drag handle
is represented by a sphere (1) and the End drag handle is represented by
a cone (2).
To display the Start dynamic input box, you can either select the
Start drag handle or press the Tab key.
When you achieve the desired start and end values, choose OK in the icon
options bar (or MB2) to create the extruded feature.
Selecting Sketches Using Selection Intent

When you choose the Extrude icon (or Insert→Design Feature→Extrude),
the Selection Intent toolbar is available to establish rules for selecting a
section string.
When extruding a sketch, you may or may not want to use all of the curves
in the sketch as the section string. To select all of the curves in a sketch in
one step, set the Curve Intent Rule in the Selection Intent toolbar to Any or
All Curves of Feature. The other rules can be applied to select a single sketch
curve or other collections of sketch curves.
Extruding a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may
define multiple features.
Rules for Extruding Section String Objects

The Body Type option in Preferences→Modeling controls whether a solid body
or a sheet body is created when extruding section string geometry. When set
to "Solid" the following rules will apply:
• Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body.
• Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set
within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole.
• Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed
creates a sheet body unless extrude with offsets is used.
Activity - Starting the Draglink
In this activity, you will start to create a model for a draglink by extruding a
sketch.
Step 1: Open the pau_draglink_1 part and save it as ***_draglink_1

Step 3: Extrude the sketch.

Verify that either Select Features or Select General
Objects is set in the Selection toolbar.
Place the cursor over one of the sketch curves and choose
MB3→Extrude.
The default direction for the extrude is normal to the sketch
plane in the +ZC direction but you want to extrude down
in the –ZC direction.
Key in –152.5 for the End value.
Choose OK.
Boolean Operations
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies. If a solid already exists in the part, a Boolean operation
can be specified to combine the extrusion with the existing solid body instead
of creating it as a separate solid body. These operations appear in the icon
options bar.
1 — Create
2 — Unite
3 — Subtract
4 — Intersect
Boolean operations may also be created as separate features by choosing the

Unite, Subtract, and Intersect icons in the Feature Operation toolbar or by
choosing Insert→Combine Bodies. When using these operations, you must
select a Target solid and at least one Tool solid.
Creating the Boolean operations as separate features allows

additional editing options in the future such as suppress and
unsuppress.
Defining Target and Tool Solids

The Target solid is the solid body on which the operations are executed.
The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid.
The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean operation
result. Therefore, the resultant solid inherits the layer, material
density, etc. of the target solid.
Unite
This option produces one solid body by defining a target solid (1)
and tool solid (2).
Subtract
This option allows material to be removed from a target solid (1)

by using another solid as the tool solid (2), leaving empty space where the
tool solid existed.
Intersect
This option results in a solid occupying the volume common to the

selected target solid (1) and tool solid (2).
Boolean Errors
If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change
in topology, the following message appears.
If you attempt to unite, subtract, or intersect a tool solid with a target solid
and the two solids do not touch, the following message appears.
If you attempt to subtract a tool solid (1) from a target solid and the operation
would produce a zero thickness (2), the following message appears.
Extrude with Taper
The Taper option is used to apply a taper to an extrusion.
When this option is toggled on, a Taper Angle drag handle (1) and a dynamic
input box are displayed with the extrusion preview to let you specify the
taper angle. Toggle the option off to remove the taper and drag handle from
the preview.
Rules for Extruding with Taper

• A positive taper angle creates an inward taper (A).
• A negative angle creates an outward taper (B).
• If the section string included interior holes, the holes would be tapered
in the opposite direction to the outside objects.
Extrude with Offsets
The Offset option is used to apply a offset to an extrusion.
When this option is toggled on, offset drag handles (2) and a dynamic input
box are displayed with the extrusion preview to let you specify the Start and
End offset values. The Start Offset handle is represented by a sphere and the
End Offset handle is represented by a cone. Toggle the Offset option off to
remove the offset and handles from the preview.
Offset Examples
The values of the Start Offset and End Offset may be positive or negative.
The positive direction is determined by the direction of the End Offset drag
handle (cone).
Start Offset Zero

End Offset Positive
Start Offset Zero

End Offset Negative
Start Offset Negative

End Offset Positive
The Extrude Dialog
The Extrude dialog provides a single user interface to specify start and end
limits, taper, offsets, and the Boolean operation for an extrusion. This dialog
is accessed by choosing the Extrude Dialog icon in the icon options bar.
The Extrude dialog also provides options to specify a different direction for
the extrusion using the Vector Constructor (1) or reverse the direction (2).
If the extrusion is symmetric about the section string, the Symmetric Distance
option (3) can be used so that only one of the limit values has to be entered.
Start/End Menu Options

Options are available to control the Start and End Limits of the extrusion by
using existing geometry instead of entering values.
Until Next — Lets you extend the extrusion to the next body along the
direction path.
Until Selected — Lets you extend the extrusion to a selected face, datum
plane, or body.
Until Extend — Lets you trim the extrusion to a selected face when the
section curves extend beyond its edges.
Through All — Lets you extend the extrusion completely through all
selectable bodies along the extrusion path.
Activity - Extruding with Offsets

In this activity, extruded features will be added to a part using offset values.
Step 1: Open the pau_extrude_1 part and save it as ***_extrude_1

Step 3: Create a tube by extruding with an offset.
Choose Extrude. (Insert→Design Feature→Extrude)
Choose Extrude Dialog from the icon options bar.
Select the inside, large circle as the section string.
Change the Boolean option to Unite.
Enter 2.5 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Toggle on the Offset option.
Enter –.25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
If the Offset drag handle is pointing away from the center of
the part, use a negative value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
positive value.
Choose Apply.
Fit the view. (MB3→Fit).

The circle is extruded from its origin normal to its creation
plane a distance of 2.5 units. The feature is .25 units thick
measured inside the circle. The thickness was defined by
the End offset value based on the direction of the offset drag
handle.
Step 4: Create a flange at the top of the cylinder.
Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion.
Change the Boolean option to Unite.
Choose Reverse Direction so that the drag handle

points down.
Enter .25 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Enter .25 for the End (Offset) value and press Enter.
the part, use a positive value for the End offset. If the Offset
drag handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use a
negative value.
Choose Apply.
The selected edge is extruded from its origin, normal to its creation
plane to a distance .25 units. The feature is defined as being .25
units thick measured outside the edge. The thickness was defined
by the values entered in the End Offset fields relative to direction
of the offset drag handle.
Step 5: Subtract an extrusion from the flange.

Select the inside circular edge shown to extrude.
Change the Boolean option to Subtract.
Choose Reverse Direction so that the drag handle

points down.
Enter .075 for the End (Limit) value and press Enter.
Enter .15 for the Start (Offset) value and .275 for the End
(Offset) value and press Enter.
the part, use positive values for the offsets. If the Offset drag
handle is pointing toward the center of the part, use negative
values.
Choose OK.
Selection Intent
The Selection Intent toolbar is available to specify curve and edge selection
rules for section strings when creating extruded features. These rules can be
applied to automatically select a collection of curves or edges in a single step
instead of selecting them individually.
Curve/Edge Intent Rules
When the feature requires a profile or just curves or edges, the Curve Intent
Rules becomes available for collecting and section building. The pull-down
menu displays the curve or edge selection rules that are applicable to the
feature you are creating.
The type filter on the selection toolbar changes to curve or edge, based on the
needs of the feature. The cursor changes to Curve Collecting, indicating you
can collect curves or edges. Choose the rule from the pull-down menu that
best describes the action for the design intent on your feature.
Any — Lets you use the original default intent method to extend a selection.
The default method can vary based on the type of object you selected. For
example, with Extrude the default could be All Curves of Feature if a curve is
selected, and Single if the selected object is an edge. The Any method lets the
controlling feature derive intent based on the type of object selected.
Single — Lets you single-select one or more curves or edges. No rule is
applied to a collection of singly-selected curves, and it is basically a simple
list of objects without intent. You can enhance a collection of singly-selected
curves or edges by moving MB3 over one of the selected objects and then
choosing another rule.
Add Connected — Lets you select a chain of curves or edges that share
endpoints.
Note that no rule is applied if the chained curves are non-associative. The
curve intent does not attempt to grow or shrink the chain if curves are added
or no longer form a single chain after an edit to the model.
Add Tangent Chain — Lets you select a tangent continuous chain of

curves or edges.
Note that no rule is applied if the chained curves are non-associative. The
curve intent does not attempt to grow or shrink the chain if curves are added
or no longer form a single chain after an edit to the model. The system does
not discard non-associative curves that are no longer tangent after an edit.
Add All of Face — Collects all edges of the face containing the edge you
select. If you already selected an edge using another rule, you can select an
adjoining face to define a collection with the Add All of Face rule. When you
select an edge, the cursor-center location determines which face is selected.
Add All of Boundary Edges of Sheet Body — Collects all laminar edges of
the sheet body you select.
All Curves of Feature — Collects all output curves from curve features,
such as sketches or any other curve features.
More Selection Intent Options
The More icon on the Selection Intent toolbar will open a dialog where
you can add special conditions for the selected rule. The availability of these
options depends on which rules are displayed in the toolbar. For example,
if the feature requires tangent chains, then the Add Connected rule is not
available in the pull-down, which in turn means that the Chain option shown
below would be disabled.
Chain — Select this option to specify that geometry is added through

chaining of entire objects that share endpoints. If you select this option,
the Chain Tangent option is cleared.
Chain Tangent — Select this option to specify that auto chaining stops at
the endpoints of wireframe where the geometry is non-tangent. This setting
assures that the geometry added to the chain is tangent. A section can
exist on multiple tangent chains. The section does not have to be a tangent
section, but its chains can be tangent chains. If you select this option, the
Chain option is cleared.
Chain Between — Select this option to determine the number of objects
you must select for chaining.
When you clear this option, chaining is a single selection operation and you
select a seed object and all objects that meet the current constraints (that is,
the Chain or Chain Tangent options) are collected.
When you select this option, chaining is a two selection operation and you
must select the start and end of the chain before the chain is collected.
This option is available only if the Stop at Intersection option is not selected.
Stop At Intersection — Select this option to specify that auto chaining stops
not only at endpoints of the curve or edge but also on intersections with other
curves or edges. When you select a chain, all other curves and edges visible in
the selection view are checked for intersections with the current chain. At
each of the intersection points (that is, where two or more objects meet at a
point, either interior or at an end point) the system bounds the chain.
This option is available only if the Chain Between option is not selected.
Tangent Angle (Degrees) — Use this option to enter a real number for the
highest possible value you want to specify as tangent degrees.
Activity: Extruding Using Selection Intent
In this activity, you will use Selection Intent options to extrude a sketch.
Step 1: Open the pau_gasket_1 part.

The part contains a sketch of a gasket profile. To make the sketch
easier to constrain, the circles defining the outer boundary of
the profile were not trimmed.
Step 3: Extrude the sketch.
Toggle the Enable Preview option off.
Set the Curve Intent Rule to Single in the Selection Intent

toolbar.
Choose the More icon in the Selection Intent toolbar.
Toggle the Stop At Intersection option on and choose Close.
Select the top of the largest circle in the center of the gasket.
Notice that only the portion of the circle that lies between the
intersections with the lines is highlighted.
Select the remaining curves along the outer boundary of the

gasket.
Select the three interior circles that define the holes.
Change the work view to the Trimetric orientation.

(MB3→Orient View→Trimetric).
Toggle the Enable Preview option on.
Enter the following values for the extrusion:
Start (Limit) = 0
End (Limit) = .125
Choose OK.
Sweep Along Guide
The Sweep along Guide option (Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide)

allows a feature to be created by sweeping a section string along a guide
string.
Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide

• Solid or sheet bodies are created based on the current Modeling
Preferences Body Type setting and the closure condition of the curves
(i.e. open string or closed string).
Open String Closed String
• An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed
loop will automatically cap the end faces, providing the Modeling
Preferences Body Type is set to Solid.
• Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using
the sweep with offset option.
• Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected.
Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners

When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp
corners, it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a
sharp corner. The section string also needs to be located on an end point
of one of the guide string objects.
1 — Guide String.
2 — Section String that is at sharp corner, a location that should be
avoided.
3 — Section String that is located away from a sharp corner and
located on an end point.
4 — Two separate line objects that provide the endpoint for the section
string.
Activity - Sweeping Along an Open Guide String
In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part by sweeping a
section string along a guide.
Step 1: Make ***_draglink_1 the work part.
Step 3: Create the swept feature.

Make layer 22 the work layer and all other layers invisible.
Choose Sweep along Guide.

(Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide)
Set the Curve Intent Rule to All Curves of Feature in the

Selection Intent toolbar.
Select one of the I-beam sketch curves as the section string (1).
The I-beam is a sketch feature so all of the curves in the I-beam
are selected except the reference line.
Choose OK.
Verify that the Curve Intent Rule to All Curves of Feature in

the Selection Intent toolbar.
Select one of the curves from the sketch on layer 23 as the

guide string (2).
Choose OK.
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Cancel the Sweep along Guide dialog.
Step 4: Unite the new swept solid with the existing solid.
Choose Unite. (Insert→Combine Bodies→Unite)
Select the first solid body created as the target body.
Select the swept I-beam body as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Activity - Sweeping Along a Closed Guide String
In this activity, you will sweep an open section string along a closed guide
string to create a solid body.
Step 1: Open the pau_sweep_1 part.
Step 3: Create the swept feature.
Choose Sweep along Guide.

(Insert→Sweep→Sweep along Guide)
Verify the Curve Intent Rule is set to All Curves of Feature

in the Selection Intent toolbar.
Select the sketch of the open profile (1) as the section string.
Choose OK.
Select the sketch of the closed profile (2) as the guide string.
Choose OK.
Choose OK to accept the direction.
Verify that the First Offset and Second Offset are set
to 0 (zero).
Choose OK.
Shade the display if desired to better view the model. The open
section string was swept along the full length of the guide
string and the system automatically caps the open ends to
produce a solid body.
The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any

section string along a guide string.
Step 4: Optional Challenge — Undo the creation of the solid and create
it again specifying a .25 single offset toward the outside of the
curves. The part should resemble the figure shown.
Revolved Body
The Revolved Body option (Insert→Design Feature→Revolve) allows

you to create a feature by rotating a section string around an axis through a
specified angle.
Rules for Revolving Section String Objects

As with extruded section strings, a solid or sheet body is created based on the
closure condition of the curves and current Body Type setting found under
Preferences→Modeling. Exceptions apply as follows:
• Revolving open section strings will cause the system to automatically cap
the end faces to produce a solid body. However, the rotation must be a full
360 and the Modeling Preferences Body Type switch must be set to Solid.
• The Right Hand rule determines the direction of the sweep.
Revolve Methods
After selecting a section string, a dialog is displayed to choose a method
to use to create the revolved body.
Axis & Angle - Allows the creation of a single feature by revolving the
section curves about a specified axis.
• The amount of rotation is determined by entering a Start Angle and End
Angle. The total number of degrees cannot exceed 360.
• The plane of the selected curves is considered zero degrees. The angles
entered determine the number of degrees the system revolves the selected
curves about the selected axis.
• Entering a Start Angle which is greater than the End Angle causes the
system to sweep in the direction of negative rotation. First Offset and
Second Offset function in the same manner as the offsets discussed in

extruded bodies.
Trim To Face/Plane - Allows the creation of a feature on the target solid by

revolving a section string to a trimming face or datum plane.
Trim Between Two Faces/Planes - Allows the creation of a feature on the
target solid by revolving a section string between two trimming faces or
datum planes.
Defining a Sweep Region for Revolved Features

The Selection Intent dialog is not available when defining a section string for
a revolved features. In some cases, the selected section string may define
more than one possible sweep area and you will be prompted to define a
region to sweep.
You will be prompted to define a region when the selected section string
is made up of one of the following:
• Noncontiguous geometry that makes up a closed loop (A).
• Geometry that provides more than one possible sweep area (B). In this
example, the curves produce three possible regions.
Activity - Creating Revolved Features
In this activity, you will create revolved features.

Step 1: Open the pau_revolve_1 part.
The part contains a sketch to be used as the section string and a
datum axis to be used as the axis of revolution.
Step 3: Select and Revolve the Section String.
Choose Revolved Body.

(Insert→Design Feature→Revolve)
Select the sketch as the section string.
Choose OK.
Choose Axis and Angle.
Select the Datum Axis from the graphics window and choose
OK.
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 360
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = 0
Choose OK.
A solid revolved body is created from an open section string. If
a solid body is desired through a sweep of less than 360 , the
section string must be closed or offsets must be specified.
Shade the part to check the shape of the solid body.
Step 4: Revolve a closed section string with an Offset.

Now use the same section string as before to create a new revolved
body using an offset and an angle to form a shell.
Choose Cancel.
Choose Undo. (MB3→Undo or Ctrl-Z)

Select the sketch again as the section string and choose OK.
Select the Datum Axis from the graphics window and choose
OK.
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 180
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = .25
Choose OK.
Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and
revolves in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the
positive axis of rotation. (Datum Axis). The Right Hand Rule
for Positive Rotation applies.
Step 5: Revolve a solid face using Axis and Angle option.

Now close one end of the solid without creating any new section
string geometry by revolving an existing face.
The cue line should still be prompting to select a section string.
Choose Solid Face from the dialog.
Select the solid face (1) as shown and confirm the selection.
Choose OK twice.
Choose Axis and Angle as the method of revolution.
Choose XC Axis.
Select the far end point of the edge, as shown below, as the
rotation point.
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = –90
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = 0
Choose OK.
The cue line prompts to Choose boolean operation from the
dialog that is to be performed with the revolved feature.
Choose Create.
Step 6: Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.
Select the target (1) and tool (2) solids as shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 7: Optional Challenge — This shell is one of two molded parts that
must fit together. Add a lip to the outside edge of the part by
extending the outside edges of the top planar face with an offset
value and height value equal to half the shell thickness.
Activity - Adding a Revolved Feature to the Draglink

In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part by adding a
revolved feature.
Step 1: Make ***_draglink_1 the work part.
Step 3: Revolve a section string (1) to create a feature (2).

Make layer 24 selectable to view the section string (1) and make
all other layers invisible. Layer 1 will remain the work layer.

Select the sketch (1) shown below as the section string and
choose OK.
Select the vertical line shown to define the vector for the axis of
revolution.
Choose OK.
Start Angle = 0
End Angle = 360
First Offset = 0
Second Offset = 0
Choose OK.
Choose Create.
Step 4: Unite the new revolved solid body with the existing solid body.
Select the existing solid body as the target body.
Select the new revolved solid body as the tool body.
Choose OK.
Activity - Extruding to a Face
In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part.
Step 1: Make sure ***_draglink_1 is the work part.
Step 2: Extrude a section string to a face.

Make layer 25 selectable and all other layers invisible. Layer 1
should still be the work layer.
The section string geometry (1) is now visible.
Verify the Curve Intent Rule is set to either Any or All Curves
of Feature in the Selection Intent toolbar.
Select the sketch (1) as the section string.
Change the Boolean option to Subtract.
Choose Reverse Direction so that the extrude drag

handle points down into the existing solid.
Verify the Start (Limit) value is set to 0.
Change the End (Limit) option to Until Next.
The preview indicates that the length of the extrusion is

determined by the first face it intersects which is the bottom
face of the part.
Choose OK.
Summary
Swept features are created by extruding, revolving, or sweeping a section
string. The section string may be composed of sketch curves, explicit curves,
solid edges, solid faces, and sheet bodies.
Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more
existing solid bodies.
In this lesson you:
• Created extruded features.
• Created an extruded feature with offsets.
• Created a revolved feature.
• Created a feature by sweeping a section string along a guide.
• Applied boolean operations.
Lesson
16 Editing the Model
Purpose
To modify solid body features by editing their defining criteria.
Objectives

• Playback the construction of a model.
• Edit feature parameters during playback.
• Move a Feature.
• Delete a Feature.
• Suppress and unsuppress a feature.
• Rename a feature.
• Reattach a feature to a different face.
Editing the Model
Editing Features
There are several different ways to access options to edit features in NX.
Edit Pull Down Menu
Choosing Edit→Feature from the menu bar provides many options related to
editing features. Some of these options are outside the scope of this course.
Edit Feature Toolbar

All of the options to edit features in the Edit pull down menu are also
available in the Edit Feature toolbar. This toolbar can be customized to only
display the icons of frequently used editing options.
Editing the Model
Part Navigator
Feature editing options are also available in the Part Navigator.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the Part Navigator icon in the Resource
Bar on the right side of the NX window. Selecting the node for the
feature and clicking MB3 will display a pop-up menu.
Editing the Model
Feature MB3 Pop-up Menu

Some of the more common feature editing options are available in the feature
MB3 pop-up menu. The options available in this menu will depend on the
type of feature and the method used to create it.
To access the MB3 pop-up menu for features, Select Features must be on in
the Selection toolbar.
Editing the Model
Suppress and Unsuppress
The Suppress and Unsuppress options allow you to temporarily remove and
restore features from the solid body and its display.
Suppress
Choosing the Suppress Feature icon (or Edit→Feature→Suppress)

displays the Suppress Feature dialog with a list of all features in the part.
Select the feature(s) to be suppressed then choose Apply or OK.
Suppressed features still exist within the math model but are only
temporarily removed from the display of the model. Since the suppressed
features still exist, they may be restored using Unsuppress Feature.
Suppressing features facilitates:
• Temporary reduction in the size of the model, making it easier to work
with. This speeds up creation, object selection, edit, and display time.
• The removal of non-critical features, such as small holes and blends, from
the model for other applications.
• Creation of features in locations where conflicting geometry exists. For

example: if there is a need to position a feature using an edge that has
already been blended, the blend need not be deleted.
When a parent feature is suppressed, the child features are also suppressed.
Unsuppress
This option restores previously suppressed features.

Choosing the Unsuppress Feature icon (or Edit→Feature→Unsuppress) will
display a list of all suppressed features in the Unsuppress Feature dialog.
Select the feature(s) to be unsuppressed then choose Apply or OK.
When a child feature is unsuppressed, any suppressed parent features are
also unsuppressed. When a parent feature is unsuppressed, its children
remain suppressed.
Editing the Model
Move
The Move Feature option (Edit→Feature→Move) allows a feature that

is not associatively positioned to be moved to a new position. This option
excludes all swept features, relative datum features, and instance arrays
as well as features whose location has been constrained using positioning
dimensions. Features whose position is determined by associative positioning
dimensions must be moved by editing the positioning dimensions.
A Move Feature dialog will list those features that are eligible to be moved.
After you select a feature, a second Move Feature dialog will present four
methods available to move the feature:
Delta XC, YC, ZC
This option allows the feature to be moved by specifying a distance and

direction using rectangular coordinates, based upon the Work Coordinate
System. (Delta XC, Delta YC, and Delta ZC)
To a Point
This option allows the feature to be moved from a reference point to a

destination point. The Point Constructor will become available during the
operation to assist in the move.
Editing the Model
Rotate Between Two Axes

This option allows the selected feature to be moved by rotating that feature
from a reference axis orientation to a destination axis orientation about a
pivot point.
In the example below, the pivot point is defined at 0,0,0, the –XC axis (1) is
the Reference axis, and the –YC axis (2) is the Destination axis.
CSYS to CSYS
This option allows the selected feature to be repositioned from its current
coordinate system to the desired coordinate system. A Reference Coordinate
System and a Destination Coordinate System must be defined using the
CSYS Constructor.
The relocated feature will maintain the same relative position to the
Destination Coordinate System as it had with the Reference Coordinate
System.
Editing the Model
Deleting Features
If you choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar (or
Edit→Delete), an icon options bar is displayed in upper left corner of the
graphics window.
Choosing the Features icon allows you to select features to delete. Choosing
OK will delete the selected features.
When a feature is deleted from a body, the space it occupied or voided is filled
in exactly as it was before the feature was created.
If a feature is mistakenly deleted, Undo function may be used immediately
after the deletion to restore the feature.
Any features whose placement, not position, is dependent on the
deleted feature will also be deleted. For example, if a hole has been
created using a datum plane for its placement face, and the datum
plane is deleted, the hole will also be deleted.
Editing the Model
Feature Playback
Feature Playback (Edit→Feature→Playback) lets you review how

the model is created, feature by feature. The model may also be edited as
it is reviewed.
When Feature Playback is initiated, the Edit during Update dialog appears
and the playback pauses at the first feature in the model history. The
graphics window will display this first feature but will not display any
features of the solid model that occur later in the model history.
You may browse forward or backward through the features in the model.
Once the intended feature has been reached, you may edit or interrogate it’s
defining parameters and step to another feature. At any time a trigger may
be set to update the model starting at the current feature and continuing
until the model is complete, or until a feature fails to update.
The message area in the dialog shows whether the current feature updated
successfully as well as any applicable error or warning messages if the
feature fails to update.
All options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled
while the model is being reviewed or edited.
Editing the Model
Undo — undoes the modifications made to the model since playback

began.
Go Back To — allows backward navigation through the model to a

feature chosen from the Update Selection dialog. (The dialog contains a list of
the features created before the current one, in order of creation.)
Step Back — allows backward navigation through the model one

feature at a time.
Step — advances one feature at a time through the model.
Step To — allows forward navigation through the model to a selected

feature. In this case, the Update Selection dialog lists the features that
have not yet been rebuilt.
Continue — triggers the update process, which continues until the

model is completely rebuilt or until a feature fails.
Delete — deletes the current feature.
Suppress — suppresses the current feature.
Suppress Remaining suppresses the current feature and all

subsequent features.
Review the model — lets you investigate, but not edit, the rebuilt
model with options from the menu bar or the MB3 popup menu. (The options
available are the same as those in the Gateway application.) Review the
Model cannot be used to review features that have not yet been rebuilt.
Edit — lets you change the parameters or position of the current

feature. A second dialog will appear with options to Edit Parameters, Remove
Unused References, and Edit Position.
Edits are not permanent until the model is completely rebuilt. If you
edit a feature and then step back to an earlier feature, the edits will
be lost. This will occur if Undo, Step Back, or Go Back To is chosen.
Editing the Model
Update Failures
When an edit is made to a feature, the model is updated (or rebuilt) to

incorporate this change. Sometimes the edit may cause a failure in a feature
that occurs later in the model history. The Edit During Update dialog will
appear if an update failure occurs and allow you to resolve the problem.
In the example below, an edit was made to a hollow feature that results in the
removal of an edge that is later blended. After the edit is made, the blend
fails during the model update and the Edit During Update dialog appears.
The options that allow you to advance forward through the model history
(Step, Step To, and Continue) are disabled until the failure is resolved and the
feature successfully updates. You may delete, suppress, or edit the current
feature or step back and edit an earlier feature.
Editing the Model
Additional Edit During Update Options

Some of the options in the Edit During Update dialog apply specifically to
update failures.
Accept — used to acknowledge a single warning message about a

failed feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue. The
feature that fails is marked "out of date" in the Part Navigator.
The status of features may also be viewed by choosing Information→Feature.

The features that are “out of date” are listed with a (!) in the Feature Browser.
Accept Remaining — acknowledges the update failures of the current

feature as well as all subsequent features so that each warning message does
not have to be accepted individually.
Show Failure Area — temporarily displays failed geometry. This option
is available only if an object involved in the failure, such as a tool body, is
available for display.
Editing the Model
Show Current Model — displays the part of the model that has been
successfully rebuilt.
For performance reasons, the display does not change during update
when an update method other than Show Current Model is used.
After the model update has finished, the display is updated.
Post Recovery Update Status — specifies what should happen after an
edit is made during an update failure.
• Continue — restarts the automatic update process from where it left off.
• Pause — stops at the next feature after an edit is made and lets you
choose other Edit during Update options, rather than automatically
resuming the update.
Editing the Model
Selection Toolbar
The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a feature for
modification or the extraction of data is required. This method of editing
allows an Object/Action approach, where the object to edit is selected first
and then the necessary action is defined.
The Select Features must be on to allow the selection of features using the
Object/Action approach. The Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of
selectable features.
Other options in the Selection toolbar such as Reset and Deselect All may be
used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.
Editing the Model
MB3 may be used to select an available operator for that object. When
pressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the object for the pop-up menu
to appear.
MB3 Menu for Most Features MB3 Menu for Sketches
Options may vary based upon application and feature selected.
Editing the Model
Activity - Playback, Move, and Delete Features
In this activity, the Playback function will be used to gain an understanding

of how a model was constructed. The skills required to move a feature that is
not located by positioning dimensions will also be demonstrated.
Step 3: Review the model construction.
Choose the Feature Playback icon from the Edit

Feature toolbar. (Edit→Feature→Playback)
All of the solid features are suppressed except the base solid
feature which is BLOCK(0).
Step 4: Move forward to the next feature.
Choose the Step icon.
Editing the Model
The next solid feature, EXTRUDE(1), is updated.
Step 5: Examine the extruded feature.

The next set of actions will demonstrate how a feature may be
examined to see how it was constructed.
Choose the Edit icon in the Edit During Update dialog.
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.

The extruded feature is highlighted in the graphics window
because it is the current feature.
Choose Feature Parameters.

Examine the dialog and graphics window to see that the edge
of the block feature was extruded with an offset value.
Choose Back twice and then Cancel to return to the Edit

During Update dialog.
The defining parameters of the feature could have been redefined

using this option.
Step 6: Move forward to the next feature.
Choose the Step icon.
Editing the Model
The next feature, T_SLOT(2), is updated.
Try to Fit the view using the Fit icon in the View toolbar.
All options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled
while the Edit During Update dialog is displayed.
Choose the Review the model icon.
Fit the view using the Fit icon.
The Review the model option allows view options to be accessed

during playback.
Choose OK.
Continue to Step through until the model has been completely

updated.
Editing the Model
Step 7: Move a feature relative to the WCS.

The pad (1) is a form feature that was not located with positioning
dimensions. The pad will be moved using the Move Feature
function.
Choose the Move Feature icon from the Edit Feature

toolbar. (Edit→Feature→Move)
The dialog lists the features that may be moved. The
BLOCK(0) feature is the base feature on which all of the other
features are constructed.
RECTANGULAR_PAD(8) is a feature located without
positioning dimensions.
All of the other features of the model are located associatively
using positioning dimensions and are not eligible for the Move
Feature option.
Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(8).
Choose Apply.
DXC = .75
DYC = –.5
DZC = 0
Editing the Model
Choose OK.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved a distance of .75 in the

positive XC direction and .5 in the negative YC direction of
the WCS.
Step 8: Rotate a feature Between Two Axes.

Choose Apply.
Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.
The Cue Line is prompting you to define a pivot point. Select

the Mid Point (1) of the Rectangular Pad edge as shown below.
Choose XC Axis.
Editing the Model
Choose YC Axis.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is rotated 90 about the specified

pivot point from the XC axis toward the YC axis.
Step 9: Move a Feature from CSYS to CSYS.

Choose OK.
Choose Csys to Csys.
Choose the X Axis, Y Axis icon.
Select edge (1) as the X axis and edge (2) as the Y axis.
Choose OK.
Editing the Model
Choose the Offset from CSYS icon as the method to

define the Destination coordinate system.
Select the yellow Existing Coordinate System at its origin.
Choose OK.
The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved such that its relationship

to the Reference coordinate system is maintained relative to
the Destination coordinate system.
Step 10: Delete a Feature using the Object/Action approach.

Verify Select Features is turned on in the Selection toolbar.
Editing the Model
In the graphics window, place the cursor over the rectangular

pad that was just moved and choose MB3→Delete.
The pad is removed from the model.
Step 11: Do not save or close the part.
Editing the Model
Activity - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions
In this activity, you will edit the creation parameters of a feature and then
capture one aspect of the design intent by editing a feature’s positioning
dimensions to be associative to the creation parameters of another feature.
Step 1: Edit a Feature’s Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose the Edit Parameters icon.

Choose BLOCK(0).
Choose OK.
The parametric values for the block are displayed in the
graphics window. A parameter may be chosen by selecting it
from the graphics window or by choosing Feature Dialog.
Note the expression that controls the width, p8=3.120; this will
be used in the next few steps.
Choose Feature Dialog from the Edit Parameters dialog.
Change the X Length to 2.75.
Choose MB2 to approve the parameter change.
Choose MB2 again to approve the change to the indicated

feature.
Editing the Model
Choose MB2 a final time to approve the change to the model.

Notice that after the part updated, the pad on the bottom is no
longer in the center. The design intent is that the pad should
always remain in the center of the part.
This situation will be remedied in the next step.
Step 2: Edit the Pad’s Positioning Dimensions using the Object/Action

approach.
Verify Select Features is turned on in the Selection toolbar.
In the graphics window, place the cursor over the rectangular

pad shown in the above figure (RECTANGULAR_PAD(4))
and choose MB3→Edit Positioning.
Editing the Model
In the graphics window, select the p39=1.560 expression.

To see the pad feature and expressions better, the view may
need to be rotated and updated (MB3).
Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part,
entering a simple equation will capture this aspect of the
design intent.
Enter p8/2.
The expression p8 controls the width of
the part.
Choose MB2 three times.
The positioning dimensions for the feature are displayed in the

graphics window.
Editing the Model
Step 3: Edit the Block Width using the Object/Action approach.

In the graphics window select the base block feature at the
location as shown in the below. You will need to wait for the
ellipsis (+...) to appear, then select with MB1 and use Quick
Pick to step through the multiple candidates. Watch the Status
line, when it reads BLOCK(0), accept the feature with MB2.
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Edit Parameters from the pop-up window.
Select the p8=2.75 dimension from the graphics window.
Change the value to 5.00 .
Choose MB2 twice to complete the edit.

Notice that the pad feature remains in the center of the block.
Editing the Model
Activity - Using the Update Tool
In this activity, you will edit a feature that causes a feature to be positioned
completely outside the target body. Using the Edit during Update dialog, you
will rectify the problem and continue the update of the model.
Step 1: Edit a Feature’s Parameters.
Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1.
Choose the Edit Feature Parameters icon.

Choose BLOCK(0) and select MB2.
Change the value to 1.75 .
Editing the Model
Choose MB2 three times to complete the edit.

The Edit during Update dialog appears.
The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in

Choose Show Current Model.

The model appears in the graphics window relative to the
new 1.75 width value.
Choose Show Failure Area.

The reason for the failure may now be clearly seen; the hole
falls outside the bounds of the body.
Choose the Edit icon in the Edit During Update dialog.
Choose the Edit Position icon.
Editing the Model
Enter p8-.5 and choose MB2 four times.

The hole now falls within the solid model, correcting the
failure. The model updates correctly.
Editing the Model
Part Navigator
The Part Navigator allows various actions to be performed on features.
Holding down MB3 on a feature node in the Part Navigator displays a feature
specific pop-up menu offering pertinent editing options.
To access the Part Navigator, choose the icon on the Resource bar on the
right side of the NX window.
The options in the pop-up menu may vary depending on what feature is
selected and what operation may be pending at the time. Many of the options
are not available if the Modeling application is not active.
Editing the Model
The following options appear on the Part Navigator MB3 pop-up menu for
feature nodes.
Display Dimensions
Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature’s parameter values to be
displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). The temporary display
remains until a Refresh is performed.
Show/Hide
Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed.
This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought
back by using the Show/Hide options or by using the blanking functions found
under the Edit→Blank options in the Menu bar.
The Hide Body option "blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to.
The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If the Hide
Parents option is used on a swept feature, the system will hide (blank) the
parent curves which generated the swept feature. If the swept feature is
derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the
parent solid body. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting
curves," which are produced directly from a curve feature operation, such
as with Offset Curve.
Make Current Feature

Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. This
option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the
solid body, and then add more features at that point in the model hierarchy. If
this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of
the build hierarchy, making it the current feature, all of the features after
it are marked inactive. As new features are created they are inserted into
the build hierarchy before the inactive features.
If feature creation is not currently applicable, such as from
the Gateway application, the Make Current Feature option is
unavailable.
Filter
Lets you apply a system filter to the Part Navigator display tree based on the
features currently selected. These filters let you simplify the display tree by
hiding features by type or timestamp order.
To turn off a filter, place the cursor in the Part Navigator away from
a feature node, click MB3, and turn off the Apply Filter option in
the pop-up menu.
Editing the Model
Edit Parameters
Lets you edit the feature’s parameters (same as Edit→Feature→Parameters).
Double-clicking on a feature name in the Part Navigator will also display
the Edit Parameters dialog.
Edit Positioning
Lets you edit the feature’s positioning dimensions (same as

Edit→Feature→Positioning)
Suppress and Unsuppress Feature

Choosing Suppress causes the feature to be suppressed and an immediate
update to the model to be performed. Suppress works with the checkbox
associated with the feature node. When the feature is suppressed, the check
is removed from the checkbox. When the feature is unsuppressed, the check
is displayed in the checkbox. The option on the pop-up menu changes to
Unsuppress, which may be used to unsuppress the feature.
Reorder Before/After
Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by
positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build
hierarchy. Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered
relative to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus.
Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Part Navigator window to
perform a feature reorder. Multiple features may be selected by holding
the Ctrl key down during selection.
Group
Same as Format→Group Features. This option lets you group features into
a special collection called a Feature Set. Members of a Feature Set can be
controlled together during suppress, delete and move feature operations.
Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog to appear. The features
included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the
Part Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name.
If you delete a Feature Set, all of its member features are also
deleted. To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members,
first remove its members.
Editing the Model
Replace
The replace option allows a feature’s definition to be replaced or "redefined"
by another feature. For example, a surface that is used as a trim face could
be replaced for a different surface without having to delete or redefine
several other features. For more information on replace see the technical
documentation.
Rename
Features are named by the system on creation, such as BLOCK(0). The
rename option allows user-defined names to be added. The user defined name
will appear in addition to the system defined name in the Part Navigator
(i.e. BLOCK “my block”(0)).
Delete
Deletes the selected feature (same as Edit→Delete).
Object Dependency Browser

The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of
a feature to be interrogated.
Information
Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window.
Properties
This option provides access to General and Attribute information for the
feature selected. General properties include the feature name, which can be
edited similarly to the Rename function. Attributes can be added to any
feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column
of the Part Navigator. For more information on feature attributes and Part
Navigator columns see the technical documentation.
Editing the Model
Activity - Reordering Features with the Part Navigator

This activity will show how reordering a feature impacts the design of the
part.
Step 3: Determine how the part was constructed.

Another way to review the construction of a model is to suppress
all the features and then unsuppress the features one at a time.
Choose the Part Navigator icon from the Resource Bar

and size as required.
Choose the push pin icon in the upper left hand corner to
permanently display the Part Navigator.
Click on the checkmark to the left of BLOCK(0).

The block feature is suppressed as well as all of the other
features. This is because the subsequent features possess a
child relationship to the block.
In the Part Navigator, unsuppress each feature by clicking in

the checkbox to restore the display. Start with BLOCK(0)
and work down.
Editing the Model
This should afford a better understanding of how the part

was constructed.
Step 4: Reorder the Hollow feature.

Select the Hollow feature in the Part Navigator.
Place the cursor over the node for HOLLOW(1), press and hold
down MB1, drag the feature just below EXTRUDED(2).
The hollow feature is reordered after the extruded feature and
the graphics window reflects the edit.
Editing the Model
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(2) and drag the

feature just below BLEND(5).
Notice the sharp corners on the inside of the part.
Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(5) and drag the

feature just below BLEND(6).
Now there is a radius on the inside edges.
Step 5: Identify and Rename a Feature.
Editing the Model
Select the node name BLEND(4) using MB1.

The corresponding feature highlights in the graphics window.
Since the feature has been identified, it can now be renamed
with a description that is more meaningful to the user.
Place the cursor over the node name BLEND(4), use the MB3
pop-up menu to choose Rename.
Enter THROAT_BLEND and press Enter.

The new name is reflected in the Part Navigator. Notice that
the time stamp [(4)] is still included.
Close the Part Navigator Window (use the push pin icon).
Editing the Model
Delaying Model Updates
Delayed Update on Edit
As more features are added to a model, the model will take longer
to update. If you are making several minor edits to a complex model with
many features, it may be beneficial to control when the model is updated.
Instead of waiting for the model to update after each edit, you can delay the
updates until after all edits are specified.
To delay model updates, choose Tools→Update→Delayed after Edit. If this
is an option that will be used often, you can add the Delayed Update on
Edit icon to the Edit Feature toolbar.
• If Delayed Update on Edit is off, the part is updated after the completion
of each edit operation. This is the default setting.
• If Delayed Update on Edit is on, feature updates are delayed while edits
are made. For example, the positioning dimension of a feature may be
changed followed by an edit to the parameters of another feature without
updating the model.
Delayed Update on Edit may not be used to delay a delete, suppress, or

unsuppress feature operation.
Update
Once the Delayed Update on Edit option is enabled and edits are
made, the Update option becomes available so that you can update the model
when it is convenient.
This option is accessed by choosing Tools→Update→Update Model. If this
is an option that will be used often you can add the Update icon to the Edit
Feature toolbar.
The model will be updated automatically when the part is saved.
Editing the Model
Reattaching a Feature
One of the options available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach.
Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined.
A feature reference may be an attachment face, a thru face, a target edge for
positioning, etc. Objects that may have their references redefined include
most form features (holes, pockets, grooves, pads, slots, and bosses), and
linear instance sets of these features, trim faces of extruded and revolved
features, and user-defined features (UDFs).
In the figure below, a slot feature is reattached from the original placement
face to a new face.
Editing the Model
Using the Reattach Dialog

The Reattach dialog only enables the options that pertain to the selected
feature. For example, a feature must include a thru face for the Specify
Thru Face option to be enabled and must include one or more positioning
dimensions for the Redefine Positioning Dimensions option to be enabled.
When an option is chosen, the existing references of the type in question are
highlighted. For example, if a thru slot is selected and the Specify First Thru
Face icon is chosen, the current thru face for the slot is highlighted.
1 — Current positioning dimensions

2 — Reference direction type
3 — Change reference direction
4 — Change the normal direction
5 — Specify location of feature
Editing the Model
Reattach Options
The following options are available to redefine feature references:
Specify Target Placement Face — allows a new attachment face

for the feature being edited to be specified.
Specify Reference Direction — allows a new horizontal reference

to be specified for the feature being edited.
Redefine Positioning Dimensions — allows new positioning

dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited.
Specify First Thru Face — allows the first through/trim face of the
feature being edited to be redefined.
Specify Second Thru face — allows the second through/trim face of

the feature being edited to be redefined.
Specify Tool Placement Face — allows the tool face of a User

Defined Feature (UDF) to be redefined.
In addition, while using any of these redefine feature references options, the
following options on the Reattach dialog are available:
Filter — allows filtering of selectable object types including faces, datum
planes, edges, and datum axes. The default is All Types. The list of filter
options available is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen.
Positioning Dimensions — A list window displays the types of positioning
dimensions currently on the selected feature. If MB1 is used to select a
dimension in this list, its available references are highlighted in the graphics
window. Double-clicking with MB1 on a dimension in the list allows it to be
redefined.
Direction Reference — allows the definition of a new Horizontal or Vertical
feature reference. The default is always set for the existing reference type.
Reverse Direction — allows the feature’s reference direction to be reversed.
Reverse Side — allows the feature’s normal direction to be reversed when
reattaching that feature to a datum plane.
Editing the Model
Specify Origin — allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by

moving it to a specified origin. This option is useful when reattaching
features to datum planes. Since features are initially placed at the center
of a plane, the update may fail since the plane’s center may not be near the
feature’s actual position. This option may be used with all features.
Delete Positioning Dimension — allows deletion of a selected positioning
dimension. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions, this
option is grayed out.
Editing the Model
Activity - Reattaching a Feature
In this activity, you will move a feature from one face to another.
Step 1: Open the pau_reattach_1 part.
Step 3: Reattach the pad feature.

In the graphics window select the rectangular pad (Status line
should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(1))
Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.
Select Edit Parameters from the pop-up menu.
Choose Reattach from the Edit Parameters dialog.
A Reattach dialog displays icons for the selection steps and other
options for reattaching the feature.
The icon for Specify Target Placement Face is highlighted.
Also, notice that the current placement face for the Rectangular
Pad feature is highlighted in the graphics window.
The Cue Line prompts to select a Target face to define the new
placement face for the feature.
Editing the Model
Select the right face of the solid (1).

Now the second icon, Specify Reference Direction highlights,
the current horizontal reference vector is displayed in the
graphics window, and the cue prompts you for selection of
a new horizontal reference.
Select the lower edge of the face (2) as the horizontal reference.
Now the third icon, Redefine Positioning Dimensions,

highlights and the Cue Line prompts you to select a Dimension
to Redefine.
Select the vertical positioning dimension from the graphics

window (2.500).
Editing the Model
Choose the lower front edge (1) of the solid as the target object
as shown below.
Select the bottom outside edge of the pad (2) feature as the
tool edge.
Select the horizontal positioning dimension from the graphics

window (1.000).
Select the right vertical edge (1) of the solid as the Target
Object as shown below.
Select the right outside edge (2) of the pad feature as the
tool edge.
Editing the Model
Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the feature.
The holes also move with the pad. This is because the holes are
child features of the pad. They were placed on a face of the pad
and were positioned relative to the edges of the pad.
Editing the Model
Summary
The Edit Features functions provides an efficient and robust capability to
change design, form, fit, and function. Because parametric values can be
accessed and edited, investment of parametric design time is not wasted
when the need for design changes occur. The good designer will possess good
modeling skills that keep in mind downstream editing requirements.
This lesson introduced:
• Suppressing and Unsuppressing Features.
• Moving Features.
• Deleting Features.
• Using the Feature Playback Option.
• Using the Edit During Update Dialog.
• The Part Navigator.
• Delayed Update on Edit Option.
• Reattaching a Feature to a Different Face.
Lesson
17 Instance Arrays
Purpose
This lesson is an introduction to Instance Arrays.
Objectives

• Create a Rectangular Array.
• Create a Circular Array.
Instance Arrays
Instance
You can use the Instance option to duplicate existing features and
eliminate repetitive tasks when creating models. This option can be accessed
by choosing the Instance Feature icon from the Feature Operation toolbar or
by choosing Insert→Associative Copy→Instance from the menu bar.
Choosing this option displays a dialog which allows you to specify an Instance
type. Rectangular and Circular Instance Arrays are supported as well as the
ability mirror individual features or an entire solid body.
Instance Arrays
An Instance is a shape linked feature, similar to a copy. The Instance not only
duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature.
Since all instances of a feature are associated, the parameters of the original
feature may be edited and the changes are reflected in every instance of the
feature. The instance itself is also a parametric feature so parameters such
as the number of instances and spacing may be edited.
The following Instance Types are available:
• Rectangular
• Circular
• Mirror Body (Not covered in this course)
• Mirror Feature (Not covered in this course)
• Pattern Face (Not covered in this course)
There are three methods of creating Instance arrays:

• General
• Simple
• Identical
In most cases the General method is the best practice. However, in very
complex models, system performance may be affected. In these cases, using
the Simple method may increase performance and in a worst case scenario
the Identical method may be required.
Most Feature Operations (Edge Blend, Chamfer, Hollow, etc.) may
not be instanced.
Instance Arrays
Rectangular Instance Array
This function allows the creation of a linear array of instances from the
selected feature(s). These arrays may be in either the XC or YC direction
or both.
All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC - YC plane.
The WCS can be redefined while in the process of creating arrays.
The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of
the feature that the array is based on. If the feature position is edited, the
array position will also update.
After the feature(s) to be instanced is selected, the following parameters
must be entered:
• Number Along XC — The total number of instances in the XC
direction, including the original feature to be Instanced.
• XC Offset — The spacing between the instances in the XC direction.
• Number Along YC — The total number of instances in the YC

direction, including the original feature to be Instanced.
• YC Offset — The spacing between the instances in the YC direction.
The offset values can be either positive or negative. The direction will be
relative to the current orientation of the WCS.
The total number of instances for both the XC and YC directions must be
a whole number greater than zero.
1 — Hole selected for instance.
Number Along XC = 3
XC Offset = .75
Number Along YC = 4
YC Offset = 1
Instance Arrays
Circular Instance Array
This function allows a circular array of instances from selected features to

be created.
After selecting the feature to be instanced in a circular array, the parameters
for the circular array must be supplied. Parameters include the following
values:
• Number — The number of instances to be created in the circular
array, including the existing feature.
• Angle — The angular spacing between instances, about the reference

point.
Once the feature is selected and the parameters specified, a rotation axis
must be selected. The plane in which the circular instance array will be
created will be normal to this rotation axis, regardless of WCS orientation.
A rotation axis may be defined by specifying a Point & Direction (Vector
Constructor dialog) or by specifying a Datum Axis.
Defining a point and direction will not maintain positional
associativity. If the defined point moves, the circular array will
not move with it. Defining the rotation axis by a datum axis will
maintain positional associativity.
After choosing the Point & Direction method and defining a rotation axis, you
will also be prompted to specify a Reference Point. This is the location that
the instanced feature will be rotated about, relative to the rotation axis.
1 — Hole selected for instance.

2 — Reference Point (Arc Center)
3 — Rotation Axis (+ZC)
Number = 8
Angle = 45
Instance Arrays
Activity - Rectangular Instance Array
In this activity, a rectangular instance array will be created from a hole

feature.
There will be a total of six holes in the instance array. Two holes in
the XC direction and three holes in the YC direction.
Step 1: Open the pau_array_1 part.
Step 3: Create a hole.
Choose the Simple hole type.
Select that Planar Placement Face (1) and the Thru Face
(2) as shown.
Enter .257 as the diameter of the hole and choose OK.
Instance Arrays
Position the hole as shown below.
Step 4: Orient the WCS.

The WCS must be in the proper orientation in order to create
the instance array.
Choose Format→WCS→Orient.
Choose X-Axis, Y-Axis.
Select the X–Axis (1) and Y–Axis (2) as shown.
Instance Arrays
The proper WCS orientation is shown below.
Choose OK.
Step 5: Create a rectangular array of the hole feature.
Choose Instance. (Insert→Associative Copy→Instance)
Select Rectangular Array.
Choose SIMPLE_HOLE(14). The feature may be selected

from the graphics window or from the Instance dialog.
Choose OK.
Method = General
Number Along XC = 2
XC Offset = 1.25
Number Along YC = 3
YC Offset = .687
Choose OK.
A temporary display of the instance array will appear in the
graphics area. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is
shown in the graphics window. Choosing No will return to
the Enter Parameters dialog.
Instance Arrays
Choose Yes.
Instance Arrays
Activity - Circular Instance Array
In this activity, a circular instance array will be created from multiple

features.
The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to
be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. The figure below
illustrates the “Before and After” model.
Step 1: Open the pau_array_2 part.
Step 3: Create the Instance Feature.
Choose Instance. (Insert→Associative Copy→Instance)
Choose Circular Array.
Select the following five features from the Instance dialog:
EXTRUDED(5)
BOSS(6)
BOSS(7)
EXTRUDED(9)
SIMPLE_HOLE(12)
Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1,

dragging over their names in the Instance dialog,
and releasing MB1.
Choose OK to confirm the selections.
Instance Arrays
Method = General
Number = 3
Angle = 120
Choose OK.
The axis of rotation must be selected. Using a Datum Axis
maintains positional associativity.
Choose Datum Axis.
Select the Datum Axis (1) as shown.
A temporary system display, previews the arrangement of

the instances to be created.
To speed up the display process, only the first feature selected
will be previewed.
Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct.
Step 4: Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature.
Choose Chamfer. (Insert→Detail Feature→Chamfer)
Choose Single Offset.
Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes.

Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK.
Key in an Offset value of 1.5 and choose OK.

Notice that there is a choice to apply the chamfer only to the
selected feature or to apply it to all instances.
Instance Arrays
Choose Chamfer all instances.
Step 5: Edit the Instance array parameters.

Select the first instanced feature from the list and choose OK.
All options available for editing the selected feature are
displayed in the dialog that appears. The options in the dialog
may vary depending on which feature is selected.
Choose Instance Array Dialog.
Method = General
Number = 4
Angle = 90
The Radius value is inferred by the distance from the

arc center of the feature to the Datum Axis that was
selected as the Rotation Axis for the Circular Array.
Instance Arrays
Choose OK three times to complete the edit (or MB2).

The part should now have four legs.
Instance Arrays
Activity (Optional) - Associativity of the Rotation Axis
This activity will demonstrate the difference in positional associativity when

using the Point Direction and Datum Axis options to define the rotation axis
of a circular instance array.
Step 1: Open the pau_datumaxis_1 part.
Step 3: Investigate the model.
Choose Layer Settings (Format→Layer Settings) and

make the display of ALL layers Selectable.
Instance Arrays
The model contains two identical hole patterns. The central

hole in each pattern is positioned associatively to the relative
datum planes in the part. The hole pattern on the left was
created by specifying a point in space and a vector as the
rotation axis. The pattern on the right was created by
specifying a relative datum axis as the rotation axis.
Step 4: Edit the model.

(Edit→Feature→Parameters).
Select the BLOCK(0) feature and choose OK.
Change the X Length to 5 and press Tab.
Change the Y Length to 10 and choose OK.
Choose OK to dismiss the feature Edit Parameters dialog.
Instance Arrays
Choose OK to update the model.
Instance Arrays
The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole
pattern on the left does not update as expected. This is due to
this hole pattern being created with a non-associative reference
point and direction vector.
The left hole pattern maintained its relationship to the objects
used to define it, but the non-associative specified point in
space does not change. The hole pattern on the right that
depends on the relative datum axis to define the rotation point
and vector updates as expected.
Instance Arrays
Summary
The Instance functionality duplicates existing features, eliminating repetitive
efforts in the creation of models.
In this lesson you:
• Created a Rectangular Instance Array.
• Created a Circular Instance Array.
Appendix
A Additional Projects
This appendix contains Additional Projects for you to work on.
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide A-1
Additional Projects
Project 1
A-2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
Additional Projects
Project 2
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 3
Additional Projects
Project 4
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 5
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 6
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 7
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 8
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 9
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 10
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 11
Additional Projects
Project 12
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 13
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 14
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 15
Additional Projects
Project 16
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 17
Additional Projects
Additional Projects
Project 18
Additional Projects
Appendix
B Point Constructor Options
Overview
This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may
be used.
The Point Constructor dialog box provides a standard way to specify points.
It allows the creation of point objects as well as the determination of locations
in three-dimensional space.
Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided,
icons at the top of the dialog box, or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in
the fields provided.
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide B-1
Point Constructor Options
Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations
When you choose the Point icon, the Point Constructor lets you create point
objects. Points appear on the screen as plus signs (+).
When you use the Point Constructor in any other option, you are only
specifying temporary locations. These locations are displayed as asterisks (*).
Choose Refresh to remove the asterisks.
Points may be used to locate other objects, such as the title block on a
drawing. Points may also be used to construct curves or surfaces.
Locating positions with the Point Constructor dialog box is also valuable.
For example, the end of a line or the center of a circle may be specified to
locate objects in model space. The positions of the control points of a curve
may also be specified.
B-2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
Icon Methods to Specify a Point

The top of the Point Constructor dialog box displays icons representing
various methods for specifying a point. As the cursor is passed over these
icons, the icon block displays the name of the method.
The icon methods are described below.
Inferred Point
Depending on where you select when using this option, one of the
following single selection options will be used: cursor location, existing point,
end point, mid point or arc center. This option does not require a selection of
the particular point type for each selection.
Cursor Location
Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by

positioning the cross hairs and indicating a location. The location defined
lies on the WCS Work plane.
To locate points quickly and precisely, use a grid (see Preferences→Work
Plane →Show Grid). When Snap to Grid is on, points snap to the nearest
grid position. The grid spacing may be set as desired. The spacing in the
X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction.
For example, if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch
(.125), then the grid spacing would be set to .125. A point at exactly one inch
in X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in
X and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position.
Existing Point
Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point.

Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to
be specified. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is
generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another
object such as a the endpoint of a line, or the location of an object, such
as placement of a drawing border.
End Point
Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines
(1), arcs (2), conics (3), and splines (4).
When selecting geometry, place the selection ball near the end point (1) you
wish to select. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it
was selected (see below). Closed curves, such as complete circles, have only
one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location.
Control Point
Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric

objects. The control points, which vary for each object type, include: Existing
points, End points of conics, End points and Mid points of open arcs, Center
points of circles or arcs, Mid points and End points of lines, and End points or
Knot points of splines.
Use the cursor to select objects. Since some objects have more than one
control point, place the cross hairs near the control point desired. The system
locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected.
The illustration below shows the various locations of control points on
existing lines (1), arcs (2), conics (3), and splines (4).
Intersection Point
Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or

at the intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. If the curves intersect
more than once, the system creates the point nearest to where the second
curve was selected.
When two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane the system
creates the point on the first curve (1) selected. By projecting the second
curve (2) parallel to the ZC axis an apparent intersection is calculated and
the point (3) is defined on the first object selected (see below). Projections
are always done along the ZC-axis.
Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two non-parallel curves.

Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch
(see below).
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center
Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by

selecting the arc along its circumference.
In the example below, selecting with the circumference (1) of the large circle
within the selection ball defines the center point (2) of the large circle.
Selecting near the center of the large circle (1) will not select the center
of the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the
small circle.
Angle on Arc/Ellipse
Use this option to locate a position (1) at an angular location on

an arc or an ellipse.
The angle value is entered in degrees. The angle is referenced from the
positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. The angular
position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed
portion (2) of an arc or ellipse.
Quadrant Point
Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or

an ellipse.
Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then
at quarter-distance intervals along the object. The point located (1) is the
quadrant point nearest to the position selected (2). The quadrant position
may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (3) of an arc.
Point on Curve/Edge
Use this option to locate positions on a curve or edge by specifying

a U Parameter.
After choosing this option and selecting a curve or edge, the Point Constructor
dialog will display an entry field for a U Parameter.
The U Parameter can be a value between 0 and 1 where a value of 0 would be

the start and a value of 1 would be the end of the curve or edge.
Point on Surface
Use this option to locate positions on a surface (face) by specifying a

U Paremeter and a V Parameter.
After choosing this option and selecting a face, the Point Constructor dialog
will display entry fields for the U and V Parameters.
The U and V Parameters can have values between 0 and 1 to define the
location on the face.
Choosing a Coordinate System

Choose WCS or Absolute to specify which coordinate system the system
references when locating positions using the Base Point text entry fields. The
WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the default. The WCS may be moved to
any location and placed in any orientation. The absolute coordinate system is
a fixed coordinate system.
Offset
This option allows the specification of a position in model space offset from
a reference position in model space. The offset location may be specified
relative to the reference position using either the absolute or the work
coordinate system.
Once an offset method has been specified, it remains in effect until another
offset method is selected. The default setting is None (no offset).
Offset allows a position to be specified away from a specified reference, or
base position in one of the five ways discussed below. This is a useful tool if
the desire is to specify many positions where each position is offset from the
previous position, or when the position that is being specified is relative to
another position most easily defined by selecting a pre-existing point.
In the example below, the need is to specify a quick row of points, offset in
the X direction and Y direction. The first point (1) could be specified, the
offset would be set to rectangular and the values entered, OK could then be
chosen a number of times to offset the remaining points from each previous
point. Each alternating OK specifies the next base position, then the next
offset position based on the values.
Exiting the Point Constructor menu when using an offset requires the return
of the offset setting to NONE. This may be accomplished by choosing the
RESET button, or by manually changing the offset type back. If The NONE
setting is not reset, the Point Constructor continues to offset positions from
the last specified position.
Reset
Use the Reset button to quickly set the X-Y-Z coordinate fields to 0.0, and to
set the Offset option to None.
Rectangular Offset
This option allows a position to be offset by entering values that represent

the X, Y, and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a
reference point (see below).
The location of the offset point (1) relative to the reference point (2) is
determined by the coordinate system (3) selected and the orientation of that
coordinate system.
The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset.
Cylindrical Offset
This option allows an offset point (1) to be specified by entering cylindrical

coordinates.
The offset values for Radius (2), Angle (3), and Delta-ZC (4) are defined
relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below.
The radius and the angle always lie in the X-Y plane of the coordinate
system specified.
A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or
the work coordinate system.
Spherical Offset
This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical

coordinates, two angles and a radius (see below).
Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane, and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the
offset point from the X-Y plane. The radius defines the distance between the
base point and the offset point. A spherical offset may reference either the
work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system.
Vector Offset
This option allows specification of an offset point (1) by indicating a direction
and distance (2). A vector (3) is defined by selecting a line (4). The direction
of that vector is determined by which end of the line is selected.
Offset Along Curve
This option allows an offset point (1) to be defined along a curve by a specified
arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length.
How the curve is selected determines the direction in which the offset will
occur. Select the curve away from the reference position on the side of the
curve you want to specify the position. In the example below, the reference
point (1) is in the middle of the curve. The user selects at position 2 to produce
direction 3 and selects at position 4 to produce direction 5.
Appendix
C Customer Defaults
Overview
There are utilities and customization files which affect the default interface
and behavior of NX. This appendix covers these topics which would normally
be the responsibility of a system administrator.
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide C-1
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults
Customer defaults are accessed by choosing
File→Utilities→Customer Defaults.
When NX is first started (out-of-the-box) the defaults are set to User and a
variable points to a user file which may or may not exist. This is an extract
from the log file for a user named “nxuser” after logging in and starting
NX for the first time:
Processing customer default values file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/NX/nx3_user.dpv
User customizations file
C:/Documents and Settings/nxuser
/Local Settings/ Application Data/Unigraphics Solutions
/NX/nx3_user.dpv does not exist
The fact that the file does not exist is of no concern because the path is
writable for the person logged in.
NX will create the file nx3_user.dpv when and if the user makes a change
to the defaults.
If the administrator wishes to prevent the user from changing the defaults,
i.e., set them as User (Read Only), there are various ways to accomplish it:
• Create the file and customize it as you wish, and then make it read only.
• Define the file in a path to which the user cannot write. The file and the
path need not exist.
• Lock one or more defaults at a higher level, i.e. group or site level.
C-2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
Customer Defaults
Customer Defaults Levels
There are three levels of defaults that your system administrator can set.
These are site, group, and user. Any of all of these levels may be read-write,
although it is customary to set the site and group levels to read only.
At the Site and Group levels the dialog displays padlocks beside each default,
enabling the administrator to lock out a particular default for lower levels.
When a lock is active not only is the text de-emphasized but value change
is prohibited. Even if the site (or a lower) DPV file is writable the value of
a locked default can not be changed until the lock icon has been toggled off
for the given default).
Customer Defaults
For example, to lock out the ability to create promotions, the administrator
clicks the lock beside promotions at the site or group level. The icon changes
color and the text is de-emphasized.
At the user level, that default is de-emphasized an a padlock is displayed

beside it.
Customer Defaults
The system administrator can use the Default Lock Status to set the global
locked status for all of the customer defaults on all defaults pages. This
allows strategies like All are locked except..." or All are unlocked except...
instead of requiring the assertion of 5000+ individual locks.
Locks at the group level change color and the text is de-emphasized.
The user then sees all options for Site Standards de-emphasized and
padlocked. No Site Standards may now may be changed at the user level.
Customer Defaults
Setting Customer Defaults
Customer defaults have as–shipped default settings that are hard–coded.

When you change defaults at any level (assuming you have write permission
and the levels are defined) a file is created to save the settings. By default the
file is called nx3_user.dpv, nx3_group.dpv, or nx3_site.dpv.
Only the defaults that are changed from the hard–coded settings are saved,
thus the DPV files can be very small in size.
Customer defaults files are defined by environment settings. These are
typically set in ugii_env.dat on Windows systems or .ugii_env on UNIX;
however, the administrator may prevent a user from spoofing these settings
by creating a file named ugii_env.master in the UGII directory where NX is
installed to define these particular environment settings. When this file
exists any attempt to redefine the environment variables will be ignored.
When you change defaults the changes are NOT effective
immediately. They will be in effect the next time NX is started.
Customer Defaults
There are two possible settings for the user level and one each for the group
and site levels:
Variable Description
Defaults File Heading
UGII_LOCAL_USER_DEFAULTS This variable is a fully qualified file
MISCELLANEOUS specification: it can be any file name
in any location.
The recommended file extension is
.dpv
The file need not exist. The file
will be created when the initial
customizations are saved.
The directory path must exist and be
writeable to create the file.
UGII_USER_DIR This directory pointed to must have
UGALLIANCE Variables the startup directory defined in
structure outlined below. The file
nx3_user.dpv will be created when the
initial customizations are saved (if it
does not already exist) in the startup
folder.
Define this ONLY
if UGII_LOCAL
_USER_DEFAULTS is
NOT defined.
UGII_GROUP_DIR The file nx3_group.dpv will be created
Not defined when the initial customizations are
saved (if it does not already exist) in
the startup folder under the directory
pointed to.
UGII_SITE_DIR The file nx3_site.dpv will be created
UGALLIANCE Variables when the initial customizations are
saved (if it does not already exist) in
the startup folder under the directory
pointed to.
Customer Defaults
USER, GROUP, and SITE directories
There is a standard structure for customer site installation of menu files and
shared libraries. This directory structure defines three subdirectories. For
the purpose of this discussion only the startup folder need exist; however, you
might encounter the others if you have site customization.
startup Contains site-specific menu files, defaults files, and shared

libraries of menu actions to be loaded automatically at NX
startup to customize Gateway.
application Contains site-specific files defining menus and shared
libraries of menu actions for customizing NX or third-party
applications, such as NX Open customizations. Loading of
each shared library is deferred until you enter the application
that names the library on the LIBRARIES statement in
the menu file definition for the Application Button for the
application. User Tool Definition files, GRIP programs, User
Function programs that are referenced by menu file actions.
udo Contains the shared libraries defining methods for
site-specific User Defined Objects (another NX Open topic.)
Index
A Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3, C-6

Absolute Coordinate Systems . . . . . . 2-3 Setting Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Alignment Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Analysis
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 D
Annotation Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69 Through 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Assemblies Through Cylindrical Face . . . . . . 13-7
Selecting Components . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Through Edge of Curve . . . . . . . . 13-6
Assemblies Application . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Through Intersection of 2 Faces . . 13-8
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Datum Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Add Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Angle to Face Thru Edge or
Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22
B Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Tangent to a Cylindrical Face and
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Through a Point . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Tangent to Cylindrical Face and
Bottom-Up Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Parallel or Perpendicular to a
Face/Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
C Through a Point on Curve . . . . . 12-14
Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . 12-9
Double Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Through Three Points . . . . . . . . 12-13
Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Single Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Delayed Update on Edit . . . . . . . . 16-39
Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . 17-5 Delete Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Design in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Convert To/From Reference . . . . . 14-98 Dimensions
Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46
Cue Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Customer Defaults Distance between objects . . . . . . . . 7-11
Directory Structures . . . . . . . . . . . C-8 DOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
DPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide Index-1
Index
Drawing Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

deleting Instance Array
deleting a drawing . . . . . . . . 11-13 Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Drawings Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Adding a Base View . . . . . . . . . . 11-22 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Adding Projected Views . . . . . . . 11-25
creating new sheets . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
L
editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Editing Existing Views . . . . . . . . 11-27 Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Removing Drawing Views . . . . . . 11-28 Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
view preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18 Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Fully Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
E Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Partially Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Edit
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 M
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58 Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . 16-32
Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Expressions
Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Dialog with less options . . . . . . . . 4-3
Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Dialog with more options . . . . . . . 4-4
Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
List Referencers . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 7-10
Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Vary Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
F Mouse Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . 3-3 Mouse Pop-Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Hidden Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
H
Orient View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Replace View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
I
Set Rotate Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Infer Constraint Settings . . . . . . . 14-21 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Update Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Index-2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
Index
Move Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6 Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . 17-4

Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
N Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Referencing Existing Parameters . . 3-34
Notes and Labels
Reposition Component . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
annotation editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69
Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
O
S
Opening Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Selection
Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
P Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Parameter Entry Options . . . . . . . . 3-33 Selection Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 curve/edge rules . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Part Navigator . . . . . . . . 3-50, 7-8, 16-31 More options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 selecting sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . 14-68
Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Sketch
Positioning Constraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Edit Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-64
Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8, 14-13
Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Edit Dimension . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26
Positioning Form Features . . . . . . . . 3-4 Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27
Positioning Methods Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-33
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25
Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Line onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-48
Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-58
Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-51
Parallel at a Distance . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Point onto Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . 14-10
Point onto Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . 14-68
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-51
Preferences Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-46
Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48 Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18 Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Status Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Q Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Suppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Sweep Along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
Symbols
R utility symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-34
Reattach a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 16-40 linear centerline . . . . . . . . . . 11-37
©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide Index-3
Index
multiple centerlines . . . . . . . 11-35 associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36

point position options . . . . . . 11-35 cylindrical centerline . . . . . . . . . 11-41
Default option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
T deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36
Inherit option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 V
Customizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . 2-21
Selection . . . . . . . . . 1-29, 8-18, 16-14
View Preferences . . . . . . ... . . . . . 11-18
Snap Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Edges Hidden by Edges .. . . . . . 11-19
Top-Down Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Hidden Lines . . . . . . . ... . . . . . 11-19
Smooth Edges . . . . . . . ... . . . . . 11-20
U Virtual Intersections . . ... . . . . . 11-21
Unite . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Unsuppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 W
Update . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 16-39 WCS Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Update Failures . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Update Model . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . 14-59 Manipulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Utility Symbols . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 11-34 Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21–8-22
Index-4 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3
STUDENT PROFILE
In order to stay in tune with our customers we ask for some background information. This information will be kept
confidential and will not be shared with anyone outside of Education Services.
Please “Print”…
Your Name U.S. citizen Yes No
Course Title/Dates / thru
Hotel/motel you are staying at during your training
Planned departure time on last day of class
Employer Location
Your title and job responsibilities /
Industry: Auto Aero Consumer products Machining Tooling Medical Other
Types of products/parts/data that you work with
Reason for training

Please verify/add to this list of training for Unigraphics, I-deas, Imageware, Teamcenter Mfg., Teamcenter Eng. (I-Man), Teamcenter
Enterprise (Metaphase), or Dimensional Mgmt./Visualization. Medium means Instructor-lead (IL), On-line (OL), or Self-paced (SP)
Software From Whom When Course Name Medium
Other CAD/CAM/CAE /PDM software you have used

Please “check”! your ability/knowledge in the following…
Subject None Novice Intermediate Advanced
CAD modeling
CAD assemblies
CAD drafting
CAM
CAE
PDM – data management
PDM – system management
Platform (operating system)
Thank you for your participation and we hope your training experience will be an outstanding one.
This page left blank intentionally.
Practical Applications of NX Course Agenda
Monday Morning
• Introduction & Overview
• Lesson 1. Getting Started
• Lesson 2. Introduction to Solid Modeling
• Lesson 3. Positional Form Features
Afternoon
• Lesson 3. Positional Form Features (con’t)
• Lesson 4. Expressions
Tuesday Morning
• Lesson 5. Face Operations
• Lesson 6. Edge Operations
• Workbook Project Description & Section 1 Rear Differential Modeling
• Lesson 7. Model Construction Query
Afternoon
• Lesson 8. Introduction to Assemblies
• Lesson 9. Adding Components & Mating Conditions
• Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly
Wednesday Morning
• Lesson 10. The Master Model
• Lesson 11. Introduction to Drafting
• Workbook Section 3 Rear Differential Drafting
Afternoon
• Lesson 12. Datum Plane Reference Features
• Lesson 13. Datum Axis Reference Features
• Workbook Section 4 Rear Axle Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting
• Workbook Section 5 Left Pinion Modeling, Assembly, and Drafting
Thursday Morning
• Lesson 14. Sketching
Afternoon
• Lesson 15. Swept Feature and Boolean Operations
• Workbook Section 6 Power Pack Sketching
Friday Morning
• Workbook Section 7 Rear Drive Gear Modeling
• Workbook Section 8 Part and Assembly Editing
• Lesson 16. Editing the Model
Afternoon
• Lesson 17. Instance Arrays
• Workbook Section 9 Rear Drive Gear Completion
• Workbook Section 10 Assembly Completion
Class Layers and Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.
Model Geometry
Object Type Layer Assignment Category Name

Solid Geometry 1-20 SOLIDS
Inter-part Modeling 15-20 LINKED_OBJECTS
Sketch Geometry 21-40 SKETCHES
Curve Geometry 41-60 CURVES
Reference Geometry 61-80 DATUMS
Sheet Bodies 81-100 SHEETS
Drafting Objects

Drawing Borders 101-110 FORMATS
Engineering Disciplines

Mechanism Tools 121-130 MECH
Finite Element Meshes 131-150 CAE
and Engr. Tools
Manufacturing 151-180 MFG
Quality Tools 181-190 QA
Hot Key Chart
Accelerators and Hot Keys may also be listed from within an NX session by choosing
Information→Custom Menubar→Accelerators.
Hot Key Function Hot Key Function

Ctrl-A Edit, Selection, Select All Ctrl-N File, New
Ctrl-B Edit, Blank, Blank Ctrl-O File, Open
Ctrl-C Edit, Copy Ctrl-P File, Plot
Ctrl-D Edit, Delete Ctrl-Q
Ctrl-E Tools, Expression Ctrl-R View, Operation, Rotate (full
menu)
Ctrl-F View, Operation, Fit Ctrl-S File, Save
Ctrl-G File, Execute,Grip Ctrl-T Edit, Transform
Ctrl-H Ctrl-U File, Execute, NX Open
Ctrl-I Information, Object Ctrl-V Edit, Paste
Ctrl-J Edit, Object Display Ctrl-W Application, Gateway
Ctrl-K Ctrl-X Edit, Cut
Ctrl-L Format, Layer Settings Ctrl-Y
Ctrl-M Application, Modeling Ctrl-Z Edit, Undo
Ctrl-Shift-A File, Save As Ctrl-Shift-N View, Layout, New
Ctrl-Shift-B Edit, Blank, Ctrl-Shift-O View, Layout, Open
Reverse Blank All
Ctrl-Shift-C Analysis, Curve, Refresh Ctrl-Shift-P Tools, Macro, Playback
Curvature Graphs
Ctrl-Shift-D Application, Drafting Ctrl-Shift-Q
Ctrl-Shift-E Ctrl-Shift-R Tools, Macro, Record
Ctrl-Shift-F View, Layout, Fit All Views Ctrl-Shift-S Tools, Macro, Step
Ctrl-Shift-G File, Execute, Ctrl-Shift-T Preferences, Selection
Debug Grip
Ctrl-Shift-H View, Visualization, Ctrl-Shift-U Edit, Blank, Unblank All Of
High Quality Image Part
Ctrl-Shift-I Ctrl-Shift-V Format, Visible In View
Ctrl-Shift-J Preferences, Object Ctrl-Shift-W
Ctrl-Shift-K Edit, Blank, Ctrl-Shift-X
Unblank Selected
Ctrl-Shift-L Ctrl-Shift-Y
Ctrl-Shift-M Ctrl-Shift-Z View, Operation, Zoom (full
menu)
F1 Help on Context Ctrl-Alt-M Application, Manufacturing

F3 View Current Dialog Ctrl-Alt-T Application, Shape Studio
F4 View, Ctrl-Alt-W Application, Assemblies
Information Window
F5 View, Refresh Ctrl-Alt-X Tools, Lathe Cross-Section
F6 Zoom C Edit-Selection-Select
Components
F7 Rotate F Edit-Selection-Select
Features
F8 Snap View G Edit-Selection-Select
General Objects
Home Orient View-Trimetric End Orient View-Isometric
Evaluation – Delivery
NX3 Practical Applications of NX, Course #TR10050
Dates thru
Please share your opinion in all of the following sections with a “check” in the appropriate box:
SOMEWHAT
SOMEWHAT
STRONGLY
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
Instructor:
AGREE
AGREE
AGREE
If there were 2 instructors, please evaluate the 2nd instructor with “X’s”
Instructor:
1. …clearly explained the course objectives
2. …was knowledgeable about the subject
3. …answered my questions appropriately
4. … encouraged questions in class
5. …was well spoken and a good communicator
6. …was well prepared to deliver the course
7. …made good use of the training time
8. …conducted themselves professionally
9. …used examples relevant to the course and audience
10. …provided enough time to complete the exercises
11. …used review and summary to emphasize important information
12. …did all they could to help the class meet the course objectives
Comments on overall impression of instructor(s):

Overall impression of instructor(s) Poor Excellent
Suggestions for improvement of course delivery:
What you liked best about the course delivery:
Class Logistics:
1. The training facilities were comfortable, clean, and provided a good learning
environment
2. The computer equipment was reliable
3. The software performed properly
4. The overhead projection unit was clear and working properly
5. The registration and confirmation process was efficient
Hotels: (We try to leverage this information to better accommodate our customers)
1. Name of the hotel Best hotel I’ve stayed at
2. Was this hotel recommended during your registration process? YES NO
3. Problem? (brief description)
SEE BACK
Evaluation - Courseware
NX3 Practical Applications of NX, Course #TR10050
:
SOMEWHAT
SOMEWHAT
STRONGLY
STRONGLY
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
DISAGREE
AGREE
AGREE
AGREE
Please share your opinion for all of the following sections with a “check” in the appropriate box
Material:
1. The training material supported the course and lesson objectives
2. The training material contained all topics needed to complete the projects
3. The training material provided clear and descriptive directions
4. The training material was easy to read and understand
5. The course flowed in a logical and meaningful manner
6. How appropriate was the length of the course relative to the material? Too short Too long Just right
Comments on Course and Material:
Overall impression of course Poor Excellent
Student:
1. I met the prerequisites for the class (I had the skills I needed)
2. My objectives were consistent with the course objectives
3. I will be able to use the skills I have learned on my job
4. My expectations for this course were met
5. I am confident that with practice I will become proficient
Name (optional): Location/room
Please “check” this box if you would like your comments featured in our training publications.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Please “check” this box if you would like to receive more information on our other courses and services.
(Your name is required at the bottom of this form)
Thank you for your business. We hope to continue to provide your training
and personal development for the future.

NX3 Training Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NX3 Training Material

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NX3 Training Material

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Practical Applications of NX

Manual Unigraphics Publication

This edition obsoletes all previous editions.

Proprietary and Restricted Rights Notices

Restricted Rights Legend

2 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide NX 3

NX 3 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 3

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 5

Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Positional Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

6 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Adding Components & Mating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 7

Assemblies Pull-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

The Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

8 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28

Datum Plane Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 9

Activity - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36

Datum Axis Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

10 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 11

Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Customer Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

12 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

USER, GROUP, and SITE directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 13

• Open and examine models.

• Create and edit parametric solid models.

• Create and modify basic assembly structures.

• Create and modify simple drawings.

• Modify existing geometry.

• Apply the standards used in class.

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 15

How to Use This Course

Double-click on the parts subdirectory.

Select the pau_topic_1 part and choose OK.

The functional assignment of the mouse buttons can be reversed in

• MB2 — Mouse Button 2

• MB3 — Mouse Button 3

16 Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide ©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved NX 3

Part File Naming

In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring

Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names. A four

©UGS Corp., All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of NX – Student Guide 17

• Commonly used expressions

Key in _new_1, where represents your initials.